Fostex Vm200 Users Manual Page
VM200 to the manual fed4a860-4525-4f5a-b4f2-d1b553591636
2015-02-02
: Fostex Fostex-Vm200-Users-Manual-428138 fostex-vm200-users-manual-428138 fostex pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 234
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
VM200 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER USER’S GUIDE INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A A A A B B B B INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR PHONES 2TRK IN PAD PAD 26dB PAD 26dB TRIM -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 -34 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN MAX METER OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STORE RECALL STORE KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW FADER MODE AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 /-1 +1/ EXIT DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 +10 ADD.AUX EFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 EFF2 -30 CHANNEL ENTER -40 ADAT IN EFF RTN 2 10 18 -30 -40 - - 1 9 17 -30 -40 -40 -40 ANALOG IN -30 -30 -30 - 3 11 19 -30 -40 - 4 12 20 -30 -40 5 13 -30 -40 - - 6 14 -60 -40 - - 7 15 - 8 16 MASTER CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER - SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. "WARNING" "TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE." SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. 2. Retain Instructions - The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions should be followed. 5. Water and Moisture - The appliance should not be used near water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 6. Carts and Stands - The appliance should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU' AU FOND. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 9. Heat - The appliance should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 10. Power Sources - The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the appliance. 11. Grounding or Polarization - The precautions that should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated. 12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. 13. Cleaning - The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 14. Nonuse Periods - The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 15. Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. 7. Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 8. Ventilation - The appliance should be situated so that its location or position dose not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. openings. 16. Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or C. The appliance has been exposed to rain; or D. The appliance does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged. 17. Servicing - The user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Table of Contents Introducing the VM200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CHAPTER 1 About This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welcome to the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the VM200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why a Digital Mixer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual On-board Effects Processors . . . . . . . . . . Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Display and Graphic User Interface . MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N MI X MA N MI 0 20 VM L ITA NG R XE MI I RD O EC R G DI T DI FE EF F1 EF I FL EF ED CT LE EQ LL EQ CA RE ON E RY OR ST RA EQ LIB LL CA RE SS C RE BU LO SO N PA IT EQ ED LO SO LO SO ON O ON ON 0 -10 0 +1 -20 0 0 +1 -30 -10 0 -40 0 +1 -20 -10 0 0 VM200 User’s Guide 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 . .9 . 10 . 10 . 11 . 12 . 12 . 12 . 13 . 14 . 15 . 15 . 15 . 16 . 16 Touring the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 CHAPTER 2 SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -40 About This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Panel Control Surface. . . . . . . . Analog Control Section . . . . . . . . . . LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Wheel and Neighboring Keys . . [] Keys. . . . . . . . . . . [ENTER] and [EXIT] Keys. . . . . . . . . Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SYSTEM] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [MIDI] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Scene Status . . . . . . . . . . . Key Mode Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [ROUTING/PHASE] Key. . . . . . . . . . [PAIR/GROUP] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CH VIEW] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CHANNEL/METER] Key . . . . . . . . . Fader Mode Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . [AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], and [AUX4] [EFF1] and [EFF2] Keys. . . . . . . . . . [CHANNEL] Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected EQ Section . . . . . . . . . . . . [EQ ON] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [RECALL] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eff Edit Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [EFF1] and [EFF2] Keys. . . . . . . . . . Effect Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [RECALL] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [STORE] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rec Buss Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scene Memory Section . . . . . . . . . . [RECALL] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [STORE] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Control Section . . . . . . . . . Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [ON] Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... Keys . ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . 17 . 18 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 21 . 21 . 22 . 23 . 23 . 23 . 24 . 24 . 24 . 25 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 27 . 27 . 27 . 28 . 28 . 28 . 28 . 29 . 29 . 29 . 30 . 30 . 30 . 31 . 31 . 31 . 32 . 32 . 34 3 [ON] key function . . . . . . . . EQ Section Rotary Controls Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 36 38 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 43 44 45 45 46 46 48 48 49 49 50 51 52 52 53 53 57 57 Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channels 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channels 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channels 9–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channels 17–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Channels 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pad Switches (Input channels 1–4) . . . . TRIM Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverting the Input Phase . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channel EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Input Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and Soloing Input Channels Feeding Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REC Buss Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST Buss Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Mute Channels . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Input Channel Settings . . . . . . Copying Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 5 . . . . Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM200 System Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning the VM200 On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Few Tips on Using the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An Important Note About Word Clock Information Stopless Rotary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Channel Edit Function Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Page Parameter Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lit & Flashing LED Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finally...Let’s Get Started! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Channel Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing a Mix Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 59 60 61 61 61 62 63 63 64 65 65 65 65 66 67 67 67 67 67 68 68 69 70 72 EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Equalizers (EQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 4 VM200 User’s Guide Adjusting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . EQ Enabling Channels . . . . . . Bypassing the EQ . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ Preset Library List . . . . . . . Recalling EQ Programs . . . . . . Storing EQ Programs . . . . . . . Editing EQ Program Titles . . . . Copying EQ Settings . . . . . . . . EQ Preset Library Parameters . CHAPTER 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 . . 97 . . 98 . . 98 . . 98 . . 99 . . 99 . 100 . 101 . 105 . 105 . 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 108 . 108 . 108 . 109 . 109 . 110 . 110 . 110 . 111 . 111 . 112 . 112 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 116 . 116 . 117 . 118 . 120 . 121 Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 About This Chapter. Chapter Contents . . VM200 Effects. . . . . Effects Library . . . . VM200 User’s Guide . 77 . 80 . 80 . 81 . 83 . 83 . 84 . 86 . 88 . 90 . 92 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 About This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAT OUT & S/P DIF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the ST BUSS OUT Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the ST BUSS OUT Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting the ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the REC BUSS OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the REC BUSS OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the REC BUSS OUT Meters . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the REC BUSS OUT Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter) Monitoring AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the AUX Send and Master Setting . . . . . . Pre-fader/Post-fader AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoothing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Buss Routing for Each Channel . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 8 . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 About This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and Soloing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MON SEL Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOLO MODE Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Outs and Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two Track Input (2TRK IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering Signal Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Input/Output Level Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Channel, Aux Send & Effect Send Meters . CHAPTER 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 . 123 . 124 . 125 5 Effect Preset Library List . . . . . . . . . . Applying Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Effects Processor . . . . . . Setting Effects Return . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Signal to Effects Processor . . Routing Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Sends Signals. . . . . . . Pre-fader/Post-fader Effect Sends. . . . Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Monitoring Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Return Signals . . . . . . Setting the Effect Return Level . . . . . . Panning Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . Storing Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . Editing Effect Program Titles . . . . . . . Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 9 ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... Level. . . . . . . Master Level . ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... Scene Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is Scene Memory? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scene Edit Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Can You Store in a Scene? . . . . . . . . . . Recalling Mix Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling a Scene Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling a Scene Automatically at Start-up . . Recalling Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Motorized Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Mix Scenes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Scene Memory Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recall Safe Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Recall Safe Channels . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Recall Safe Parameters . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 10 125 128 128 128 129 129 130 130 130 131 132 132 132 132 133 133 134 135 137 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 147 148 149 149 151 151 151 152 153 154 156 156 156 157 Digital Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Digital Connections, Word Clocks, and Sample Rates 160 Word Clock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 WORD IN/OUT Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Setting the Master Word Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Setting the VM200 as Master or Slave . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Multitrack Recording and Mastering to a DAT . . . . . 164 Digital I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ADAT IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Using ADAT IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Assigning Channels to ADAT DIRECT SENDs . . . . . . 166 Using S/P DIF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Using S/P DIF IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Assigning S/P DIF Signals to Channels . . . . . . . . . . 169 Cascading the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 6 VM200 User’s Guide CHAPTER 11 VM200 & MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 About This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the VM200 with MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cascading Two VM200s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels . . . . . . . . . . System Exclusive Messages (Fostex Exclusive) . . . Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Program Change Messages to Recall Scenes Using Control Change Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Control Change Assign Table. . . . . . . . Examples: Using Control Change Messages. . . . . . Controlling Parameters Using Fostex Exclusive . . Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitting MIDI Bulk Dump Messages . . . . . . . Receiving Bulk Dump Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC (MIDI Machine Control) Send . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Device ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering MMC Send Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Locate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitting the Locate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 . 197 . 198 . 200 Specifications and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 About This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tables & Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Fader Gain Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . Q ............................... Program Change Assign Table 1 (User) . . . Program Change Assign Table 2 (Preset) . . Control Change Assign Table 1 (User) . . . . Control Change Assign Table 2 (Preset) . . . Preset Scene Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI In/Out Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . Declaration of EC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment Fostex Distributors List In Europe . . . . . . VM200 User’s Guide . 173 . 173 . 174 . 174 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 179 . 180 . 184 . 185 . 187 . 188 . 189 . 189 . 191 . 192 . 192 . 192 . 194 . 195 . 195 Initializing the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 About This Chapter. . . . . . Chapter Contents . . . . . . . Initializing the VM200 . . . . Default Setup Parameters . APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 . 201 . 202 . 203 . 205 . 206 . 206 . 208 . 210 . 210 . 211 . 211 . 213 . 216 . 225 . 226 . 226 . 226 7 8 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Introducing the VM200 RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 1 LO About This Chapter IT ON LO ON ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO This chapter introduces the VM200 Digital Recording Mixer, explains how to use this guide, and how to install the mixer. It also provides a summary of the main features of the VM200. LO -30 -40 -30 - -40 - -60 -40 10 10 11 12 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 - -30 -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -10 -20 -20 -10 -30 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - PA I GR R/ OU P 0 +1 -30 0 -20 4 12 20 -10 - -40 -20 -10 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 14 -20 -10 0 0 +1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 13 -10 0 0 +1 ON ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 0 0 +1 ON LO SO LO SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 0 +1 ON LO SO ED EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 0 +1 ON SO LO ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 0 LO IT EQ ED PA N SO Q FR EQ Q PA N EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 0 +1 ON ED EQ ID -M N GA I /LO EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 LO IT PA N SO FR EQ EQ ED ON IT Welcome to the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using this Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why a Digital Mixer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four-band Parametric EQ & EQ Library . . . . . Dual On-board Effects Processors. . . . . . . . . . Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Display and Graphic User Interface Scene Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 PA N 0 SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ Chapter Contents VM200 User’s Guide 9 Introducing the VM200 Welcome to the VM200 Thank you for purchasing the Fostex VM200 Digital Recording Mixer. The VM200 is an affordable programmable digital audio mixer that can be extremely useful in numerous audio applications, including smaller-scale live sound reinforcement, as well as audio and video post-production. However, it is designed primarily for digital audio recording in a MIDI or project studio, especially if you are using digital hard disk or tape-based multitrack recording technologies such as the Fostex FD-8, VR-800, or other ADAT-compatible digital recorders. Using this Guide This user’s guide includes the following main sections: Chapter 1: Introducing the VM200 describes the major features and explains how to install the VM200. Chapter 2: Touring the VM200 takes you on a guided tour of the mixer’s inputs and outputs, faders, controls, buttons, and LCD display elements. Chapter 3: Getting Started offers illustrated system examples and explains how to connect and turn on the power to the VM200, and try out a few features, such as the EQ and Effects processors. Chapter 4: Inputs describes the available input channels and discusses pad switches, trim controls, phase inversion, as well as muting, panning, grouping, and routing input channels. Chapter 5: EQ describes the parametric equalizer, the EQ Library, and how to store, recall, and edit EQ programs. Chapter 6: Monitoring describes the monitoring and soloing capabilities of the VM200 and explains how to view various level meters. Chapter 7: Outputs describes the stereo buss output, the record buss output, the AUX sends, and how to monitor, route, solo, and mute the buss outs. Chapter 8: Effects describes the Effect Library, presets and user programs, and how to apply and route to and from the effect processors. Chapter 9: Scene Memories introduces scene memories and explains how to store and recall scenes, and how to prevent specific parameters from being updated by a recalled scene memory. Chapter 10: Digital I/O discusses the VM200’s digital inputs and outputs, including the ADAT and S/P DIF digital connectors, word clock masters and slaves, and cascading multiple VM200s. Chapter 11: MIDI describes the Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) functions of the VM200. Chapter 12: Initializing explains how to re-initialize the VM200. 10 VM200 User’s Guide Installing the VM200 Appendix A. Specifications and Data provides technical specifications and other data, including a MIDI Program Change Assign table, a Control Change Assign table, System Exclusive messages, etc. The Index can help you locate specific information quickly. Installing the VM200 Locate the VM200 on a level, stable surface. You can also mount the VM200 vertically in a rack using the Fostex 9910 optional rack mount adapter. Remove the six screws from the bottom of the VM200, attach the rack mount adapter, then reinstall the screws as shown in the illustration below. rack-mount adapter 3 screws per side attach adapters to sides of mixer side view of installed adapter Refer to the Precautions for information on appropriate locations and environments for the VM200. Refer to “Getting Started” on page 43 and “Outputs” on page 107 for information on connecting the VM200 to other components. VM200 User’s Guide 11 Introducing the VM200 Feature Summary This section summarizes the main features of the VM200. Audio Specifications ❑ 20-bit 64-times oversampling, delta sigma modulation A/D converters ❑ 20-bit 128-times oversampling, delta sigma modulation D/A converters ❑ 90dB or higher dynamic range ❑ 20Hz to 20kHz, +1dB/-3dB frequency response ❑ industry standard 44.1K or 48K sampling rates Inputs and Outputs ❑ 20 Channel Inputs • Channels 1 - 8: Analog In • Channels 9-16: ADAT In (20-bit) • Channels 17-20: Effect Return (for internal effects only) • Switchable balanced XLR and balanced/unbalanced phone jacks • +48V phantom power support for XLR Analog In jacks 1-4 • Route S/P DIF input signals to any of 20 channels ❑ 18 Outputs • Stereo buss output (ST BUSS OUT) • Recording buss output (REC BUSS OUT) • 20-bit digital two-channel output (S/P DIF OUT) • 20-bit digital ADAT eight-channel output (ADAT OUT) • Two auxiliary outputs (AUX SEND 1-2) • ADD AUX function adds two auxiliary outs (AUX SENDS 3-4) • Solo buss outputs post-fader listen (PFL) signals from any channel or buss to the Monitor or Phones outputs. ❑ MIDI IN, MIDI OUT, and MIDI THRU (built into the mixer) ❑ Word Clock In and Out ❑ Analog two-track input jacks (2TRK IN) enable you to monitor two tracks without affecting the mix. ❑ 4 Insert jacks for external effects returns 12 VM200 User’s Guide Mixer Functions Mixer Functions ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Scene Memory (up to 100 scenes) 3 Preset Scenes (INIT, RECORDING, MIXDOWN) 60mm continuous motorized faders Stopless rotary controls 4-band parametric EQ for channels 1-16 Dual internal effects processors EQ Library with 50 Presets plus 50 memory locations for customized EQ programs Effect Library featuring 50 Preset effect programs, and memory locations for 50 user-customized effect programs The ADAT DIRECT send function enables you to assign input channel 1-8 signals to ADAT 1-8 (and turn any channel on or off). You can pair adjacent (odd-even) input channels. You can pair AUX SEND 1 and 2, and AUX SEND 3 and 4. Three Fader groups (A, B, C) Three Mute groups (A, B, C) Channel Copy function copies parameter settings, including mute group and fader group information, from one channel to another EQ Copy function copies EQ settings from one channel to another. LED-segment meter displays ST BUSS OUT level LCD meter displays levels for 20 input channels or 18 output channels Two Solo modes, PFL and MIX-SOLO, enable you to monitor signals pre-fader or post-fader Large 256x64 dot resolution LCD Display MIDI functions ❑ You can use Program Change messages to recall scenes (Presets and User tables) ❑ You can use Control Change messages to control mixer parameters (Presets and User tables) ❑ You can use System Exclusive messages to control mixer parameters ❑ You can output MIDI Machine Code (MMC) by pressing keys on the control panel ❑ MIDI Bulk Dump capability for data backup and transfer VM200 User’s Guide 13 Introducing the VM200 Mixer Configuration The VM200 is equipped with a total of 20 analog and digital inputs: eight analog mono input channels (1-8), four internal effects returns, and an eight-channel ADAT digital input. A two-channel S/P DIF digital input signal can be routed to any of 20 channels, and a two-track analog input (2TRK IN) is also provided. External effects signals can be returned to the VM200 via four INSERT phone jacks. Input channels 1 through 8 feature trim control attenuators and TRS phone jack connectors. Input channels 1 through 4 can also be switched to +48V phantom-powered balanced XLR-type connectors. Two effects busses send signals to the two on-board effects processors. An Effects Library contains 50 high-quality preset effects programs. The effects can be modified and stored in the Effects Library for future recall. The VM200 returns the effects signals via channels 17-20. The VM200 features 18 outputs. A stereo buss outputs the stereo buss signal; a record buss outputs the record buss signal. There are two fixed AUX Sends, and two more can be added through the use of an ADD AUX function (although the record buss is unavailable when the ADD AUX parameter is on). Digital outputs include a 20-bit digital two-channel output (S/P DIF OUT), a 20-bit digital ADAT eight-channel output (ADAT OUT). Monitor and headphone outputs facilitate stereo monitoring via speakers or headphones. A four-band parametric equalizer is available for each input channel. EQ programs can be stored in and recalled from an on-board EQ Library. You can cascade multiple VM200s together to increase the number of input channels. Why a Digital Mixer? One of the best things about a digital audio mixer is that it is able to combine audio signals from various sources without introducing virtually any signal degradation, distortion, crosstalk, or noise. Digital recording to tape or hard disk-based systems is increasingly popular. However, many of these small studios use 4-, 8-, or 16-channel analog mixers. The VM200 Digital Recording Mixer enables you to keep your audio signals in the digital domain for both mixing and recording, resulting in new levels clarity and quality in your recordings. 14 VM200 User’s Guide Four-band Parametric EQ & EQ Library Four-band Parametric EQ & EQ Library Channels 1 through 16 feature a four-band parametric equalizer (EQ), with variable Gain, Frequency, and Q controls. The LO-MID and HI-MID bands use parametric EQ. The LO band can function as an HPF, shelving, or parametric EQ; the HI band can function as an LPF, shelving, or parametric EQ. An EQ Library can store up to 100 EQ programs for future recall. Dual On-board Effects Processors The VM200 features two on-board stereo effects processors, EFF1 and EFF2. These effects processors utilize Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology (ASP) to create high-quality ambient reverbs, as well as choruses, delays, flangers, and other effects and combinations. ASP is an exclusive new digital effect processing technology designed by Fostex that excels at maximizing the efficiency of digital signal processing power. It achieves an overwhelmingly high-density Early Reflection sound and smooth High Dump response rate via a Harmonic Feedback Algorithm, and conducts elaborate reverb simulation using High Density Logarithmic Processing technology, which eliminates mutual interference between integrated delay modules, reducing audio impurities. Digital I/O The VM200 features two types of digital inputs and outputs: S/P DIF and ADAT. The S/P DIF is a two-channel digital I/O commonly found on consumer CD players, computer audio cards, etc. The ADAT IN and ADAT OUT connectors allow a direct eight-channel connection to any ADAT-compatible digital audio recorder, such as the Fostex VR800 or the Alesis ADAT series. About the Display and Graphic User Interface The LCD display features a resolution of 256-by-64 dots and utilizes graphic icons to represent faders, send levels, and rotary control knobs. The display also provides a graphic EQ response curve and numerical readouts of mixer parameter settings. Depending on the lighting in your studio, you may wish to supplement the LCD Display with a gooseneck-type studio lamp or other light source. VM200 User’s Guide 15 Introducing the VM200 Scene Memory The VM200 enables you to store virtually every mixer parameter setting as part of a group snapshot, or “scene,” in the Scene Memory. The Scene Memory can store up to 100 scenes, which you can later recall by simply pressing a key on the VM200, or by issuing a remote MIDI Program Change command from a connected MIDI device. The Scene Memory store and recall functions let you work on a mix until you are satisfied, then store virtually all mixer fader and parameter settings for instantaneous future recall. In addition to the scene memory “slots” or “locations” for user programs, the VM200 features three preset scenes: InitMix, Recording, and Mix Down, which are designed for optimal performance in common mixing situations. MIDI MIDI connections enable you to take advantage of the VM200’s versatility. MIDI Program Change messages can recall scenes from the VM200’s Scene Memory. MIDI Control Change messages and Fostex System Exclusive messages enable real-time parameter control. To backup and transfer data between VM200s, you can use System Exclusive Bulk Dump commands. If a MIDI-compatible recorder is connected to the VM200, you can control it remotely via MMC (MIDI Machine Control). You can also cascade VM200s via MIDI connections. Faders The VM200 features eight 60mm continuous-throw faders and one Master fader. A channel layering system enables you to control up to 20 channels using only the eight faders and the Master. Page Select keys specify the “active” channel layer. You can select Channels 1 - 8 Analog In, Channels 9 - 16 ADAT In, or Channels 17 - 20 Eff Rtn. The LCD Display will show parameters specific to the selected layer. The VM200 features seven Fader modes. In each mode, the Faders function slightly differently, controlling various send and return levels. The Fader modes include: Channel, Eff1, Eff2, Aux1, Aux2, Aux3, and Aux4. The motorized faders move automatically when you recall a scene from Scene Memory, if the Motor parameter is turned on. The faders can be grouped into one of three groups, enabling you to control the group with a single fader. Faders for paired channels move as one. The faders can function as MIDI controllers if a MIDI device is connected to the VM200 via the MIDI ports. 16 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Touring the VM200 RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 2 LO About This Chapter -20 EF IT ON EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO This chapter takes you on a guided tour of the VM200, introducing various components of the control surface, including the faders, rotary controls, the Data Wheel, and other features. LO SO FR 17 EQ It also explains the operations associated with each function key. ON LO -10 0 -60 - -30 6 14 -40 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 27 28 28 29 29 30 31 32 32 36 38 41 - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 -20 -40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 12 20 - -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 -10 -20 +1 0 -10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - -40 -20 -10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 19 -20 -10 0 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 0 0 +1 0 +1 -20 -10 0 +1 ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 0 +1 ON 0 +1 0 ON LO SO LO SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 0 LO SO ED EQ CH A ME NNE TE L/ R -30 ON +1 SO LO ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED ND SE C MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - ON IT EQ ED PA N FR EQ Q PA N EQ PA I GR R/ OU P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 LO Top Panel Control Surface . . . . . . Analog Control Section . . . . . . . . LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Wheel and Neighboring Keys Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Scene Status . . . . . . . . . . Key Mode Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fader Mode Section . . . . . . . . . . . Selected EQ Section . . . . . . . . . . . EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eff Edit Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rec Buss Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scene Memory Section . . . . . . . . . Channel Control Section. . . . . . . . Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ Section Rotary Controls . . . . . Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO Q N GA I EQ /LO -M ID EQ -10 ED ON IT 0 Chapter Contents PA N -40 -30 0 +1 SO FR LO EQ EQ -20 ED ON IT PA N SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ ED IT PA N This chapter then discusses the input and output connectors and switches on the rear panel and concludes with a block diagram of the VM200. VM200 User’s Guide 17 Touring the VM200 Top Panel Control Surface The following illustration shows the top panel control surface of the VM200. Each section of the mixer is discussed in the following pages. INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR PHONES A 2TRK IN B B B B PAD PAD PAD PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 +10 TRIM -16 -60 TRIM -60 +10 -34 26dB 26dB -34 -16 +10 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 -34 -10 -60 +10 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN -50 MIN -34 GAIN MIN MAX MAX METER OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN GAIN EQ/HI SELECTED EQ GAIN EQ ON EFF EDIT EFF1 EFF2 EQ LIBRARY CURRENT SCENE STATUS FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON RECALL EFF LIBRARY STORE RECALL STORE KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW FADER MODE AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 /-1 +1/ EXIT DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 ADD.AUX EFF1 EFF2 -30 CHANNEL ENTER -40 -40 -40 ANALOG IN ADAT IN EFF RTN 18 -40 1 9 17 -40 - - - 2 10 18 3 11 19 -40 -40 - 4 12 20 -40 - - 5 13 6 14 -60 -40 - - - 7 15 8 16 MASTER Analog Control Section (page 19) Function Keys (page 22) LCD Display (page 20) Input Channel Control Section (page 32) Data Wheel and Neighboring Keys (page 21) Rear Panel (page 38) VM200 UserÕs Guide Analog Control Section Analog Control Section INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 4 A INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR PHONES A 2TRK IN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 B PAD 26dB TRIM TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM -60 -10 -34 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -50 -10 GAIN TRIM -50 -10 -50 MIN GAIN MAX MIN MAX A/B Input selectors The VM200 features four A/B Input selectors that enable you to select the A or B inputs for input channels 1 through 4. The A Inputs are balanced XLR-type connectors for use with microphones that feature XLR-type plugs, such as condenser microphones, or other input devices that require XLR connectors. The B Inputs are balanced/unbalanced TRS (tip-ring-sleeve) phone connectors, for use with dynamic microphones and other sound sources that require phone jacks. (These connectors will accept balanced or unbalanced inputs.) For more information, see “Input Channels 1–4” on page 60. The A Inputs are selected by default (the selector is not depressed). Press the A/B Input Selector to select the B input. PAD (26dB) switches The four Pad switches turn the 26 dB input pads on and off for input channels 1–4. When turned on, the input pads attenuate the signal by 26 dB. This helps the preamp handle “hot” signals. For more information, see “Pad Switches (Input channels 1–4)” on page 63. TRIM controls The four Trim controls (1–4) attenuate the gain of the input preamps in the range of +10 to -34 or -16 to -60 dB, depending on whether or not the signal is attenuated by the Pad 26dB switch. The other four Trim controls (5–8) attenuate the gain of the input preamps in the range of -10 to -50. 2TRK IN switch The 2TRK IN switch enables you to monitor the signal input to the 2TRK IN connector on the rear panel. You can monitor this signal through MONITOR OUT or PHONES OUT. The signal is unaffected by mixer settings. VM200 User’s Guide 19 Touring the VM200 Monitor Gain knob Use the Monitor Gain knob to adjust the Monitor Out level. The Monitor Out jacks output the buss signal you specify on the SETUP SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/MON function page. (The default is ST BUSS OUT.) Phones Gain knob Use the Phones Gain knob to adjust the headphone output level. LCD Display METER OL -3 -6 -9 -12 -18 -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO Contrast dial Rotate this dial left or right to adjust the contrast of the LCD Display for maximum clarity. LCD Display The LCD Display has a resolution of 256 x 64 dots. It displays various parameters and numerical values, and uses graphic icons to represent faders, rotary controls, pan positions, and switches. For more information, see “Reading the Display” on page 49. Meters The LCD Display features meters for 20 input channels or 18 output channels. To the right of the LCD Display is a pair of nine-segment LED meters for the Left and Right channels of the stereo buss signals. 20 VM200 User’s Guide Data Wheel and Neighboring Keys Data Wheel and Neighboring Keys The Data Wheel is located in the lower-right corner of the VM200. It enables you to scroll through lists of programs in the Effect and EQ Libraries. You can also use the Data Wheel to move the cursor left and right when naming a new effect or EQ program. /-1 +1/ EXIT DATA Use your thumb or finger to rotate the Data Wheel ENTER [] Keys These keys can step through scrollable lists, such as the Effect Library or EQ Library. [ENTER] and [EXIT] Keys You can use the [ENTER] key to execute certain functions, such as confirming new parameter values, writing to memory, or initializing the VM200. You can also use it to confirm new parameter settings. In many cases, if you hold down the [ENTER] key while pressing another key, the VM200 displays the key’s first function page (as opposed to the most recently-displayed function page for that key). Pressing the [EXIT] key usually exits the current operating mode and displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. The following table shows additional [ENTER] key functions. Press ENTER and... VM200 User’s Guide Operation ON Sets channel fader parameter in selected fader mode to Unity Gain. Rotary Controls Increases adjustment increment in EFF Edit or EQ Edit mode. EQ EDIT VM200 enters EQ Edit mode. (If already in EQ Edit mode, the parameter being edited will be initialized after confirmation. SYSTEM Displays the first SYSTEM function page. MIDI Displays the first MIDI function page. CH VIEW Displays the first CH VIEW function page. PAIR/GROUP Displays the first PAIR/GROUP function page. ROUTING/PHASE Displays the first ROUTING/PHASE function page. CHANNEL/METER Displays the first CHANNEL/METER function page. 21 Touring the VM200 Function Keys This section provides a brief tour of the VM200’s numerous function keys. When you press certain function keys, such as [SYSTEM] or [CURRENT SCENE STATUS], the VM200 displays a “function page” of information on the LCD Display Panel. Each function page contains parameters that you can set to configure and control the VM200. Each time you press the [SYSTEM] key, a subsequent function page is displayed. SETUP SYSTEM MIDI In many cases, repeatedly pressing a function key displays additional pages of parameters. The sequence of pages cycles around to begin again (i.e., page 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3...) Other function keys, such as EFF1 in the Fader Mode section, do not directly display information on the LCD Display Panel, but nevertheless configure or control the VM200 in other ways. Some function keys are opaque grey. Others are translucent and fixed above an LED light that can light up or flash to indicate status information. In general, the translucent function keys flash to indicate that they are available for selection. Once selected, they remain lit. Note: The procedures in this manual offer specific steps that you can follow to accomplish certain tasks. Phrases such as “press the function key twice” assume the function page cycle always begins with the first function page. This may not always be the case. If not, simply press the key repeatedly until the desired page appears. 22 VM200 User’s Guide Setup Section Setup Section The Setup section features two function keys: [SYSTEM] and [MIDI]. The SYSTEM key displays function pages that enable you to configure the VM200. The [MIDI] key displays function pages that enable you to interface the VM200 to MIDI devices. SETUP SYSTEM MIDI [SYSTEM] Key The [SYSTEM] key enables you to configure the VM200. It displays a sequence of six function pages on the LCD Display if you repeatedly press the key. SYSTEM Key Function Pages Includes parameters that enable you to... 1:CLOCK/MON Select a system clock, specify the buss to monitor, select a solo mode and key operation, turn the fader motors on or off, and set the Frame mode. 2:RCL SAFE Specify parameters that you want to remain unmodified (not updated) when you recall a scene from memory. 3:CH RCL SAFE Specify channels that you want to remain unmodified (not updated) when you recall a scene from memory. 4:SOLO SAFE Specify channels that you want to send to the ST Buss in M-Solo mode. 5:POWER ON RCL Specify which scene the mixer should recall from memory when you power on the VM200. 6:INITIALIZE Re-initialize the VM200, resetting all parameters to factory default settings. [MIDI] Key The [MIDI] key enables you to interface the VM200 with MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) instruments and devices. The [MIDI] key also features six function pages, as summarized below: MIDI Key Function Pages VM200 User’s Guide Includes parameters that enable you to... 1:MIDI TX&RX Set MIDI transmit/receive channels, set MIDI message transmission and reception on or off. 2:PGM TABLE1 Edit User Program Change Assign table 1. 3:PGM TABLE2 View Program Change Assign table 2. 4:CTL TABLE1 Edit User Control Change Assign table 1. 5:CTL TABLE2 View Control Change Assign table 2. 6:BULK DUMP Set up Bulk Dump transmission. 23 Touring the VM200 Current Scene Status The Current Scene Status section features only one key, which shares its name. CURRENT SCENE STATUS When you press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key, the VM200 enters Current Scene Status mode and displays the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. The number and name of the scene (e.g., 01:MY_SCENE) appear in the top right of the display. The CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page enables you to: • Enable the EQ for channels 1-8, 9-16, or 1-16 • Turn on the ADD. AUX parameter (to enable AUX Sends 3&4) • Set the Smoothing function to Level 1 or 2 • Set the record buss gain (REC-B.GAIN) from [∞ to -90 to 0dB] (available when ADD. AUX is off) • Set the sends for AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, and AUX4, EFF1, and EFF2 to Pre-fader or Post-fader • Pair AUX Sends (Aux1&2 or Aux3&4). Key Mode Section The Key Mode section features four function keys: [ROUTING/PHASE], [PAIR/GROUP], [CH VIEW], and [CHANNEL/METER], as described below. KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP MMC SEND CH VIEW CHANNEL/ METER [ROUTING/PHASE] Key The [ROUTING/PHASE] key displays a sequence of three function pages that let you control mixer routing, assign S/P DIF inputs to channels, and invert the phase for each channel. The ROUTING function page lets you route input channels 1–20 to the Stereo Buss (ST BUS), the Record Buss (REC BUS), or the ADAT output (DIRECT). Press a Page Select key to specify Channels 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20. Then press the [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], and/or [ON] key for each channel to route the signal to a potential destination. The indicator in the channel/buss matrix highlights (dark square). 24 VM200 User’s Guide [PAIR/GROUP] Key The S/P DIF function page lets you assign the S/P DIF digital two-track input to any odd-even pair of channels (e.g., 1&2, 13&14, etc.). The Ø PHASE function page lets you invert the phase for each of input channels 1 through 20. Press a Page Select key to specify Channels 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20. You can also use the [ROUTING/PHASE] key in conjunction with the [PAIR/GROUP] key to enter MMC mode. (For more information, see “MMC (MIDI Machine Control) Send” on page 192.) ROUTING/PHASE Key Function Pages Includes parameters that enable you to... 1:ROUTING Route input channels 1-20 to ST BUSS, REC BUSS, or ADAT DIRECT. 2:S/P DIF Assign S/P DIF digital input to any odd-even channel pair. 3:Ø PHASE Invert phase for each input channel. [PAIR/GROUP] Key The [PAIR/GROUP] key displays a sequence of three function pages that enable you to pair channels, mute groups of channels, or group faders under the control of a single fader. The CHANNEL PAIR (CH PAIR) function page enables you to pair any two odd-even channels using the [EQ EDIT] keys. The MUTE GROUP function page enables you to create three groups of channels (Mute Groups A, B, and C) that you can silence instantly. The FADER GROUP function page also enables you to create three groups of channels (Fader Groups A, B, and C). Faders in a group can be controlled by a single fader. Use the Page Select keys to specify Channels 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20; use the [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], and [ON] keys to apply these functions to specific channels. You can also press the [ROUTING/PHASE] key simultaneously with the [PAIR/GROUP] key to enter MMC mode. (For more information, see “MMC (MIDI Machine Control) Send” on page 192.) PAIR/GROUP Key Function Pages Includes parameters that enable you to... 1:CH PAIR Pair odd-even input channels. 2:MUTE GROUP Create Mute Groups A, B, C 3:FADER GROUP Create Fader Groups A, B, C [CH VIEW] Key The Channel View [CH VIEW] key displays a sequence of three function pages that display settings for specific channels, and allow you to copy channel and EQ settings from a source channel to destination channels. The CH VIEW function page lets you view (but not modify) settings for specific channels. VM200 User’s Guide 25 Touring the VM200 The CH COPY function page lets you copy channel settings from a source channel to one or more destination channels. The EQ COPY function page lets you copy EQ settings from a source channel to one or more destination channels. CH VIEW Key Function Pages Includes parameters that enable you to... 1:CH VIEW View channel parameter settings. 2:CH COPY Copy channel settings to other channels. 3:EQ COPY Copy EQ settings to other channels. [CHANNEL/METER] Key Pressing the [CHANNEL/METER] key displays two CHANNEL EDIT function pages: Channel Edit/Input and Channel Edit/Output. These are essentially the “main” pages of the VM200, the pages you will likely display most often. However, unlike other function pages, the name of the page does not appear on a CHANNEL EDIT function page. The name and number of the Current Scene appear in the top-left corner of the display. These function pages enable you to view and set the pan position for each channel. You can also view the input levels for input channels 1-20. Pressing the [CHANNEL/METER] key a second time displays the output levels for the ADAT, AUX, Effects, Record Buss, and Stereo Buss outputs. CHANNEL/METER Key Function Pages 26 Includes parameters that enable you to... 1:CH EDIT (Input) View input levels and set pan positions. 2:CH EDIT (Output) View output levels and set pan positions. VM200 User’s Guide Fader Mode Section Fader Mode Section FADER MODE AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 ADD.AUX EFF1 EFF2 CHANNEL The VM200 features 20 input channels and 18 output channels. However, with only eight faders plus the Master fader, the VM200 must use its faders for multiple tasks to accommodate all those channels. Depending on the Fader Mode, the faders (as well as the [ON], [SOLO], and [EQ EDIT] keys) control different functions. You determine which functions the faders and keys will control by selecting a Fader Mode. [AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], and [AUX4] Keys If you press one of these function keys, the faders, the Master fader, [ON] and [SOLO] keys control the AUX send signals. (To enable AUX3 and AUX4 keys, turn on the ADD. AUX parameter on the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. For more information, see “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115.) [EFF1] and [EFF2] Keys If you press one of these function keys, the faders, the Master fader, [ON] and [SOLO] keys control the EFF1 and EFF2 send signals. [CHANNEL] Key The [CHANNEL] key is something like a “Home” key. With this key selected, channel controls handle input channel signals and the Master controls handle stereo out signals. VM200 User’s Guide 27 Touring the VM200 Selected EQ Section An equalizer (EQ) enables you to boost or cut specific frequency ranges to “shape” a sound. The VM200 features a four-band parametric equalizer for each input channel. Each band features rotary controls for Gain, Frequency, and Q. The LO-MID and HI-MID bands use parametric EQ. The LO band can function as an HPF, shelving, or parametric EQ; the HI band can function as an LPF, shelving, or parametric EQ. The Selected EQ section features three keys: an [EQ ON] key, and [STORE] and [RECALL] keys for the EQ Library. For more information on using the EQ, see EQ on page 75. SELECTED EQ EQ ON EQ LIBRARY RECALL STORE [EQ ON] Key The [EQ ON] key enables you to turn on or bypass the equalization parameters selected via the [EQ EDIT] keys. EQ Library The EQ Library stores sets of equalization parameters as EQ programs that you can later recall. The EQ Library features 50 preset EQ programs. You can store up to 50 new EQ programs (in EQ Library locations 50 - 99). [RECALL] Key Pressing the [RECALL] key displays the EQ LIBRARY RECALL function page, which enables you to select from up to 100 equalization programs (00 - 99). Use the Data Wheel or [] keys to scroll through the list, and press the [ENTER] key to recall the selected EQ program. The lower half of the function page displays the pan and fader settings for each channel. [STORE] Key The [STORE] key enables you to create and store new EQ programs. Once you’ve worked on a mix, adjusting the Gain, Frequency, and Q parameters to your satisfaction for all four bands of each channel, 28 VM200 User’s Guide Eff Edit Section you may wish to store the EQ settings for future recall. Pressing the [STORE] key displays the EQ LIBRARY STORE function page. Use the Data Wheel to scroll through the list to select the location (program number) where you want to store the new EQ program. Press the [ENTER] key to display the EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page, then name the EQ program. Pressing the [ENTER] key again stores the program in the EQ Library for future recall. One way to create a new EQ program is to select the EQ program most similar to your “target” EQ, then modify various parameters to sculpt the response curve into shape. For more information, see “Storing EQ Programs” on page 86. Eff Edit Section The Eff Edit section features four keys: [EFF1], [EFF2], and [STORE] and [RECALL] keys for the Effect Library. EFF EDIT EFF1 EFF2 EFF LIBRARY RECALL STORE [EFF1] and [EFF2] Keys The [EFF1] and [EFF2] keys in the Eff Edit Section enable you to select for editing the effect that is currently loaded in effect processor 1 or 2. Note: Do not confuse these keys with the keys in the Fader Mode section of the same name. Pressing [EFF1] or [EFF2] displays an EFF EDIT function page that includes parameters related to the current effect. For example, a Large Hall Reverb effect includes parameters for Reverb Time, E/R Balance, HPF, LPF, Initial Delay, PreDelay, Room Size, etc. The 3D Chorus effect includes parameters for Depth, HPF, and LPF. Effect Library The Effect Library stores effects that you can recall. It features 50 preset effects and effect combinations. You can modify the parameters for these existing effects to create and store an additional 50 custom effect programs. VM200 User’s Guide 29 Touring the VM200 [RECALL] Key Pressing the [RECALL] key displays the EFFECT LIBRARY RECALL function page, which enables you to select from 50 preset effects programs (00 - 49). Use the Data Wheel or [] keys to scroll through the list or to select a program. Press the [ENTER] key to recall the Effect program. [STORE] Key The [STORE] key enables you to store your own Effect programs in one of 50 user program locations (program numbers 50 -99). Once you’ve edited effect parameters to your satisfaction, you may wish to store them for future recall. Press the [STORE] key to display the EFFECT LIBRARY STORE function page. Use the Data Wheel or [] keys to scroll through the list to select the location (50–99) where you want to store the new effect program. Press the [ENTER] key to display the EFFECT LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page, then name the effect program. Pressing the [ENTER] key again stores the program in the Effect Library for future recall. One way to create a new Effect program is to select the Effect program most similar to your “target” effect, then modify various parameters to sculpt the effect into shape. For more information, see “Effects” on page 123. Rec Buss Section The Rec Buss section features only the [SOLO] function key. The VM200 also features [SOLO] keys for each channel and the Master fader. For more information on the Rec Buss [SOLO] keys, see “Soloing the REC BUSS OUT” on page 113. The REC BUSS is enabled only when the ADD. AUX parameter is turned off. For more information, see “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115. 30 VM200 User’s Guide [SOLO] Key [SOLO] Key REC BUSS SOLO The [SOLO] key in the Rec Buss section enables you to solo the Record Buss. Scene Memory Section SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE The Scene Memory section includes [RECALL] and [STORE] keys that enable you to recall scenes from memory and store new scenes to memory. A “scene” is a collection or “snapshot” of virtually all the parameter settings of the VM200 at a given point in time. [RECALL] Key Pressing the [RECALL] key displays the SCENE MEMORY RECALL function page. You can use the Data Wheel or [] keys to scroll through the list of stored and preset scenes. Press the [RECALL] key again to recall the scene from memory and remain in Scene Memory mode, or press the [ENTER] key to recall the scene and exit Scene Memory mode. [STORE] Key The [STORE] key enables you to store scenes in Scene Memory. Pressing the [STORE] key displays the SCENE MEMORY STORE function page. Press the [ENTER] key to display the SCENE MEMORY NAME EDIT function page, then name the new Scene Memory. Press the [ENTER] key again to store the scene in memory. VM200 User’s Guide 31 Touring the VM200 Channel Control Section The VM200 features nine 60mm motorized faders. EQ/LO GAIN FREQ Q PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO ON ON Faders 1 through 8 are associated with separate [ON], [SOLO], and [EQ EDIT] keys. (The Master fader features only [ON] and [SOLO] keys.) Faders 1 - 8 and [ON], [SOLO], and [EQ EDIT] keys 1-8 typically control channels 1 through 8. However, they can also control channels 9 through 16, and 17 through 20, depending on the channel layer you select using the Page Select keys. (See the “Fader function” table below.) The ninth fader is the Master Fader. Faders 1 - 8 and [ON], [SOLO], and [EQ EDIT] keys also assign values to various function page parameters. +10 +10 0 0 -10 -10 -20 -20 -30 -30 -40 -40 You can also use the faders and [ON], [SOLO], and [EQ EDIT] keys as MIDI controllers by setting parameters on the Control Table function pages, which are displayed by the Setup [MIDI] function key. Faders The faders control different functions depending on the Fader Mode you select. - - 1 9 17 Faders 2 10 18 You select a Fader Mode by pressing one of the keys in the Fader Mode section of the control surface. The VM200 features seven fader modes: Channel, Aux 1, Aux2, Aux3, Aux4, Eff1, and Eff2. (For more information, see “[ON], [SOLO], & [EQ EDIT] Keys” on page 34.) Faders 1 - 8 typically control the channel gain; the Master Fader typically controls the Stereo Buss Master gain. However, in Fader Mode Aux1 for example, Fader 1 controls the channel-to-Aux1 Send gain. In Fader Mode Eff2, Fader 1 controls the channel-to-Eff2 Send gain, and so on. 32 VM200 User’s Guide Faders The following table describes the function of the channel faders and Master fader in each Fader Mode: Fader function CH Mode Input Channel 1–8 (ANALOG IN) | 9–16 (ADAT IN) | 17–20 (EFF RTN) Master CHANNEL Channel Gain ST BUSS Master Gain AUX1 Channel to AUX1 Send Gain AUX1 Send Master Gain AUX2 Channel to AUX2 Send Gain AUX2 Send Master Gain AUX3 Channel to AUX3 Send Gain AUX3 Send Master Gain AUX4 Channel to AUX4 Send Gain AUX4 Send Master Gain EFF1 Channel to EFF1 Send Gain EFF1 Send Master Gain EFF2 Channel to EFF2 Send Gain EFF2 Send Master Gain VM200 User’s Guide 33 Touring the VM200 [ON], [SOLO], & [EQ EDIT] Keys EQ/LO GAIN FREQ Q PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT The VM200 features eight sets of [ON], [SOLO], and [EQ EDIT] keys, one set for each channel fader. The Master fader also features a [SOLO] key and an [ON] key. EQ Edit keys SOLO The following paragraphs summarize the functions of these keys. SOLO Solo keys ON [ON] Keys ON On keys The [ON] keys basically turn channels on and off. In Channel Fader Mode, the channel [ON] keys turn channels 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20 on or off, depending on the channel layer you select (using the Page Select keys). +10 +10 0 0 -10 -10 -20 -20 -30 -30 -40 -40 The Master [ON] key controls various functions depending on the current Fader Mode. In Fader Mode Aux1 for example, [ON] key 1 turns channel 1 on and off, and the Master [ON] key turns the Aux1 Out on and off. In Fader Mode Eff2, On key 1 turns channel 1 on and off, and the Master [ON] key turns the Eff2 Master on and off. The [ON] keys can also transmit MMC commands in MMC Send mode. (For more information, see “MMC (MIDI Machine Control) Send” on page 192.) - - 2 10 18 1 9 17 The following table describes the function of the channel and Master [ON] keys in each Fader Mode: [ON] key function CH Mode Input Channel Master 1–8 (ANALOG IN) 9–16 (ADAT IN) 17–20 (EFF RTN) CHANNEL ST BUSS OUT ON/OFF AUX1 AUX1 OUT ON/OFF AUX2 AUX2 OUT ON/OFF AUX3 34 Channel ON/OFF AUX3 OUT ON/OFF AUX4 AUX4 OUT ON/OFF EFF1 EFF1 Master ON/OFF EFF2 EFF2 Master ON/OFF VM200 User’s Guide [SOLO] Keys [SOLO] Keys The [SOLO] keys enable you to solo channels for monitoring. The Solo Mode parameter on the SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/MON function page determines how signals from each channel will solo. They can solo individually (PFL, or pre-fader listen) or after being mixed together post-fader (M-SOLO, or mix solo). In Channel Fader Mode, the [SOLO] keys solo channels 1-20, depending on the channel layer you select using the Page Select keys. The [SOLO] keys control various functions depending on the current Fader Mode. In Fader Mode Aux1 for example, [SOLO] key 1 solos channel 1, and the Master [SOLO] key solos the AUX1 Buss. In Fader Mode Eff2, [SOLO] key 1 solos channel 1, and the Master [SOLO] key solos the Eff2 Send Master. The following table describes the function of the Channel and Master [SOLO] keys in each Fader Mode: [SOLO] key function CH Mode Input Channel 1–8 (ANALOG IN) 9–16 (ADAT IN) 17–20 (EFF RTN) Master CHANNEL ST BUSS Solo AUX1 AUX1 Solo AUX2 AUX2 Solo AUX3 Channel Solo AUX3 Solo AUX4 AUX4 Solo EFF1 EFF1 Send Solo EFF2 EFF2 Send Solo VM200 User’s Guide 35 Touring the VM200 [EQ EDIT] Keys The [EQ EDIT] keys enable you to select channels for parameter editing. When you press an [EQ EDIT] key, the VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page for the selected channel (for example, EQ EDIT CH2). This function page includes parameters that control a four-band parametric equalizer. The bands are LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI. You can adjust the equalization by rotating the [GAIN], [FREQ], and [Q] controls for each band. For more information, refer to the table below, which describes the function of the [EQ EDIT] key in different Fader Modes. [EQ EDIT] key function CH Input Channel Mode 1–8 (ANALOG IN) 9–16 (ADAT IN) Master 17–20 (EFF RTN) CHANNEL AUX1 Edits EQ for Channels 9–16 (Disabled if EQ Enable for Channels 9–16 is turned OFF.) Edits EQ for Channels 1–8 (Disabled if EQ Enable for Channels 1–8 is turned OFF.) AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 EFF1 Disabled N/A EFF2 EQ Section Rotary Controls The VM200 EQ section is horizontally subdivided into four sections: EQ-LO, EQ/LO-MID, EQ/HI-MID, and EQ HI. EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN Each band features three knobs labelled Gain, Freq, and Q that control the parametric equalizer in EQ Edit mode. The Gain rotary control sets the gain of the input preamps. The Freq rotary control specifies the frequency. The Q rotary controls adjust the selectivity of a filter. A narrow frequency band indicates a high Q value; a wide frequency band indicates a low Q values. (In the response curve, notice how a bell-shaped curve grows wider as Q decreases.) However, like many VM200 controls, in other operational modes the EQ section knobs serve multiple purposes. For example, in Channel Edit mode, the [FREQ] and [Q] knobs control the channels pan position. 36 VM200 UserÕs Guide Page Select Keys Page Select Keys The VM200 uses a channel-layer format, in which its nine faders perform multiple tasks to accommodate 20 input channels. You can imagine the VM200 as being divided into three layers. Layer 1 provides access to Channels 1 through 8, which primarily handle the analog inputs. Layer 2 provides access to Channels 9 through 16, which are used with ADAT-compatible systems. Layer 3 provides access to Channels 17-20, which are used primarily for effects returns. You can use the Page Select keys to select an appropriate channel layer. The VM200 will display parameters appropriate for the channel layer you specify. PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN 9-16 ADAT IN 17-20 EFF RTN When you press a Page Select key, it lights up, and the other two Page Select keys remain dark or flashing. Page Select Key VM200 User’s Guide Channels Displayed 1-8 ANALOG IN Channels 1 - 8 ANALOG IN 9-16 ADAT IN Channels 9 - 16 ADAT IN 17-20 EFF RTN Channels 17 - 20 EFFECT RETURN 37 Touring the VM200 Rear Panel All inputs and outputs on the VM200 are conveniently located on the rear panel. The following paragraphs briefly describe each input and output. MONITOR OUT PHONES 2TRK IN ST BUSS OUT REC BUSS OUT AUX SEND INPUT A R L R L R L R 4 L 3 2 1 8 7 6 AVIS: DE CHOC 4 A 3 2 1 WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN RISQUE A 5 ADD.AUX SEND CAUTION ELECTRIQUE REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC TO SHOCK,DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. NE PAS OUVRIR. AC IN S/P DIF +48V MIDI ADAT ON OFF +48V WORD OPTICAL IN OUT IN OUT THRU OUT IN ON OFF IN +48V B 75 POWER ON OFF ON OFF +48V B ON OFF B OUT INSERT 4 INSERT 3 INSERT 2 1 PHONES Connect a pair of stereo headphones to this stereo (TRS) phone jack. Set the output level using the PHONES Gain knob on the top panel. MONITOR OUT Connect this pair of RCA phono jacks to the inputs on your monitoring amplifier. Select the monitor signal you wish to output through these jacks using the MON SEL parameter on the SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/MON function page (see “Setup Section” on page 23). Set the output level using the MONITOR Gain knob on the top panel. 2TRK In You can input a two-track signal, such as the stereo outputs from a master recorder, to this pair of RCA phono jacks for confidence monitoring. Press the 2TRK IN switch on the top panel to monitor the signal. ST BUSS OUT The Stereo Buss Out (ST BUSS OUT) is a pair of unbalanced 1/4-inch phone jacks that outputs the left and right channels of the main stereo mix. REC BUSS OUT The Rec Buss Out (REC BUSS OUT) is a pair of unbalanced 1/4-inch phone jacks that outputs the record buss. When the ADD. AUX parameter is turned on, the REC BUSS OUT outputs Aux Sends 3 and 4. 38 VM200 User’s Guide Rear Panel AUX SEND AUX SEND 1 and 2 are a pair of unbalanced 1/4-inch phone jacks that can output an auxiliary signal to drive external effects, for example. Inputs 1 - 4: XLR or Phone Connectors (A or B) Input channels 1 - 4 accept either balanced XLR inputs (XLR-3-32 type), or balanced/unbalanced (1/4-inch) phone plugs. (Input 1-4 Phones connectors accept either balanced or unbalanced analog input.) If you are inserting a phone plug, press the A/B switch for channels 1 through 4 to select the B inputs. If you are inserting an XLR-type plug, leave the A/B switch “unpressed” to select the A inputs. You can switch phantom power to the XLR connectors on or off using switches located beneath each connector. (Many condenser microphones, for example, require phantom power.) These inputs have a nominal input range of -60 dB to +10 dB. +48 Phantom Power Turn on this switch for XLR microphones or devices connected to XLR inputs that require phantom power. Inputs 5 - 8: Phone Connectors Input channels 5 through 8 accept unbalanced phone plugs. These inputs are designed for use with line-level sources (e.g., a synthesizer keyboards, effects processors, or other devices). These inputs have a nominal input range of -60 dB to +10 dB. Inserts 1-4: Phone Connectors The Insert connectors are stereo-type phone jacks. You can connect an external effects unit to these connectors using an insert cable to send the signal to the effects unit and return it to the VM200. (For more information, see “Insert Channels 1–4” on page 62.) The Insert connectors allow you to insert a signal into the signal chain after the PAD switches and TRIM knobs. AC In Insert the female end of the AC power cable into this connector. Connect the male end to an AC electrical outlet of the appropriate voltage for your area. VM200 UserÕs Guide 39 Touring the VM200 Power Switch Use the power switch to turn the VM200 on and off. S/P DIF IN/OUT These are S/P DIF format optical digital connectors. You can connect any S/P DIF equipped device (such as certain CD players, DAT recorders, or computer soundcards) to these connectors. For more information, see “S/P DIF IN/OUT” on page 168. ADAT IN/OUT These are Alesis ADAT Multichannel Optical Digital Interface connectors. You can connect an 8-track digital multitrack recorder, such as a Fostex VR-800 or other ADAT-compatible recorder, to these connectors. For more information, see “ADAT IN/OUT” on page 165. MIDI IN, OUT, THRU These standard MIDI ports enable you to connect the VM200 to other MIDI devices. The MIDI IN port receives MIDI messages. The MIDI OUT port outputs MIDI messages. The MIDI THRU port outputs all MIDI messages received by the MIDI IN port. 75Ω On, Off Switch This switch turns WORD IN termination on and off. If the VM200 is the last device to receive word clock via the WORD IN connection, turn this termination switch on. WORD IN/OUT The Word In and Out connectors are connected to the WORD OUT and IN connectors of digital devices to receive and send word clock information for digital sync operation. 40 VM200 User’s Guide Block Diagram Block Diagram (+10~-60dBV) INPUT 1(2-4)A INPUT 1(2-4)B (+10~-60dBV) A/B +48V (-10dBV) INSERT +48V PAD 26dB TRIM (-16~-60dB) ADC S/P DIF IN L(R) S/P DIF IN L (R) ADC S/P DIF ASSIGN S/P DIF ASSIGN CH1-4 (ANALOG IN 1-4) INPUT5 (6-8) TRIM (-10~-50dB) EFFECT 1 To CH1-20 S/P DIF IN 4BAND PARA EQ EQ ON EQ ON 4BAND PARA EQ 4BAND PARA EQ S/P DIF ASSIGN S/P DIF IN L (R) S/P DIF ASSIGN CH ON GAIN ADAT OUT 1(2-4) From REC BUSS REC BUSS-L(R) M-SOLO CONTROL EFF2 POST/ PRE EFF1 POST/ PRE AUX2 POST/ PRE AUX1 POST/ PRE AUX3 POST/ PRE AUX4 POST/ PRE GAIN EFF1 POST/ PRE EFF2 POST/ PRE AUX2 POST/ PRE AUX1 POST/ PRE AUX3 POST/ PRE AUX4 POST/ PRE M-SOLO CONTROL EFF1 POST/ PRE EFF2 POST/ PRE AUX1 POST/ PRE AUX2 POST/ PRE AUX3 POST/ PRE * * * AUX4 POST/ PRE AUX4 POST/ PRE AUX3 POST/ PRE AUX2 POST/ PRE AUX1 POST/ PRE EFF2 POST/ PRE EFF1 POST/ PRE GAIN GAIN ADAT OUT 5 (6-8) From REC BUSS REC BUSS-L (R) M-SOLO CONTROL ADAT BUSS DIRECT CH ON ADAT BUSS DIRECT M M CH ON M-SOLO CONTROL M CH ON EQ ON M CH9-16 (ADAT IN 1-8) S/P DIF IN L (R) CH5-8 (ANALOG IN 5-8) ADAT DECODE (-10~-50dBV) ADAT IN S/P DIF IN S/P DIF DECODE From EFF Master EFF1 From EFF Master EFF2 EFFECT 2 CH17-20 (EFF RTN) EFF1 AUX1 AUX3 EFF1 AUX3 AUX1 EFF1 AUX1 AUX3 PAN AUX2 EFF2 ASSIGN REC BUSS ASSIGN ST BUSS SOLO (PFL) * AUX4 SOLO (PFL) ASSIGN ST BUSS AUX2 EFF2 ASSIGN REC BUSS * SOLO (PFL) ASSIGN ST BUSS AUX2 EFF2 ASSIGN REC BUSS * AUX4 AUX2 EFF2 ASSIGN REC BUSS ASSIGN ST BUSS SOLO (PFL) PAN AUX3 AUX1 EFF1 AUX4 PAN * PAN * AUX4 * When SMOOTHING LEVEL 2 is selected, each gain is automatically set to be the same. ST-BUSS (L) ST-BUSS (R) EFF2 EFF1 REC-BUSS (L) REC-BUSS (R) AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 ON MONITOR ST-BUSS MASTER SOLO (PFL) ST BUSS To CH1, 3, 5, 7 To CH2, 4, 6, 8 REC-BUSS MASTER SOLO (PFL) ON SOLO (PFL) DAC DAC M To EFF1 (2) M M M M M M M To MONITOR To MONITOR To MONITOR To MONITOR ON REC BUSS EFF1 (2) MASTER SOLO (PFL) EFF1-2 AUX1 (2-4) MASTER SOLO (PFL) AUX1-4 DAC DAC 2 TRK IN S/P DIF ENCODE MON GAIN PHONES GAIN ADAT OUT1 ADAT OUT2 L R 2 TRK IN (-10dBV) L R MON (-10dBV) PHONES L R ST (-10dBV) ADAT S/P DIF OUT ENCODE ADAT OUT6 ADAT OUT4 ADAT OUT3 ADAT OUT7 ADAT OUT8 AUX1 (-10dBV) AUX2 (-10dBV) ADAT OUT (-10dBV) L AUX3 ADD.AUX MODE R AUX4 (-10dBV) REC BUSS OUT ADAT OUT5 DAC DAC DAC DAC ADD. AUX MODE 41 VM200 User’s Guide Touring the VM200 42 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Getting Started RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 3 LO About This Chapter IT EX Q IN FR IT ED TN PA N ON GA EQ /H I SO This chapter is designed to help get you started quickly using your VM200. LO ON LO -10 0 IT -20 ED -40 -30 0 0 +1 ON -20 -10 -30 -40 0 -40 -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 45 45 46 46 48 48 48 49 49 50 51 52 - . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -40 -30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - PA I GR R/ OU P 0 +1 -30 0 -20 4 12 20 -10 - ON 0 +1 -30 0 -20 -10 - ON 0 +1 LO SO LO SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -10 -20 -10 ON LO SO ED EQ -40 0 0 +1 0 SO LO ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 13 -30 +1 ON IT EQ FR EQ Q PA N EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 -20 0 LO VM200 System Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning the VM200 On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Few Tips on Using the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keeping It Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An Important Note About Word Clock Information Stopless Rotary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower and Raise Faders to Initiate Sends . . . . . . Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Page Parameter Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lit & Flashing LED Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finally...Let’s Get Started! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ED PA N SO Q N GA I EQ /LO -M ID EQ -10 ED - ON IT PA N 0 -60 +1 SO 0 LO -30 EQ EQ FR Chapter Contents 6 14 PA N ON EQ PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N SO IN Q However, please read the Precautions, “Introducing the VM200” on page 9 and “Touring the VM200” on page 17 before you “get started.” GA /H I-M ID EQ ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ It explains how to plug in the power cord, connect to an amplifier, plug in a microphone or other source, turn on the VM200, adjust a few controls, try out some EQ settings and Effect presets, and record a stereo signal to an external recorder. VM200 User’s Guide 43 Getting Started VM200 System Example The following illustration shows one example of a recording studio based on the VM200. Monitor speakers DAT ADAT compatible Monitor amplifier Master recorder Headphones Guitar processor INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 PHONES INPUT 5 MONITOR OUT INPUT 4 A ST BUSS OUT INPUT 3 A S/P DIF IN INPUT 2 A ADAT IN INPUT 1 S/P DIF OUT ADAT OUT ANALOG IN Lead guitar MONITOR PHONES A 2TRK IN Guitar processor B B B B PAD PAD PAD PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 TRIM -60 -34 TRIM -16 -60 +10 -34 -16 TRIM -10 -60 +10 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN TRIM -10 -50 -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN MAX METER OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 Second guitar -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STORE RECALL STORE KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND Bass processor CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW FADER MODE AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 /-1 +1/ EXIT DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 +10 ADD.AUX Bass guitar EFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 EFF2 -30 CHANNEL ENTER -40 -30 -30 -40 ANALOG IN ADAT IN EFF RTN 1 9 17 -30 -30 -40 2 10 18 5 13 -30 -40 - - 4 12 20 -30 -40 -40 - 3 11 19 -30 -30 -40 -40 - - - 6 14 -60 -40 - - - 7 15 8 16 MASTER MIDI keyboard Vocal MIDI OUT MIDI IN Chorus MIDI Interface Drums 44 VM200 User’s Guide Connecting the Power Cord Connecting the Power Cord Warning: Turn off the power to all connected electronic equipment before making any connections to the VM200. Use the included power cord to connect the VM200 to an appropriate AC electrical outlet. Insert the female end into the AC input on the rear panel of the VM200. Insert the male end into a wall outlet of an appropriate voltage for your area. Turning the VM200 On and Off The power button is located on the rear panel of the VM200 next to the AC power cable input jack. When you power on your audio components, be certain to follow this sequence to prevent damage to your equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect all instruments and sound sources, including keyboards, drum machines, etc. Turn on the power to all sound sources. Turn on the power to the VM200 by depressing the power button on the rear panel. The VM200 displays the Fostex and VM200 logos, then the CHANNEL EDIT function page. (For more information on the CHANNEL EDIT function page, see “The Channel Edit Function Page” on page 49.) Make sure the volume on your monitor amplifier is not set too loud, then turn on the power to the monitor amplifier. When you turn off the power to the VM200, be sure to follow this sequence in reverse. (That is, first turn off the monitor amplifier, then the VM200, then the sound sources.) VM200 User’s Guide 45 Getting Started A Few Tips on Using the VM200 If you have experience using analog audio mixers, a few things about the VM200 Digital Recording Mixer may be new to you. This section introduces some of the advantages of working with a digital mixer. Channel Layers If a conventional analog mixing console has 16 or 24 input channels, it also likely has16 or 24 faders, the same number of [ON] keys and [SOLO] keys, etc. Each input channel is a complete module, with its own dedicated set of input connector, preamp, etc. This type of design can work well, but is redundant and subject to analog noise. The VM200 is a digital recording mixer, and does not conform to analog recording conventions. The VM200 uses an innovative “channel layering” system that enables you to control up to 20 channels using only eight faders and one Master Fader. You press one of three Page Select keys to specify the active channel layer. The faders, rotary controls, and various keys then control a channel on the selected layer, and the LCD Display shows parameters specific to the selected layer. For example, Fader 1 can control input channels 1, 9, or 17 depending on the selected channel layer. (It can also control various send levels, depending on the current mixer routing.) You can select one of the following layers by pressing the appropriate Page Select key: • Channels 1 - 8 Analog In • Channels 9 - 16 ADAT In • Channels 17 - 20 Eff Rtn 46 VM200 User’s Guide Channel Layers The following diagram illustrates the three channel layers of the VM200: The [1–8 ANALOG IN] key is lit. You can control channels 1–8. N 17-20 EFF RT EQ/HI GAIN T SELEC IN PAGE ADAT 9-16 Q MID GAIN EQ/HIALOG FREQ IN PAN 1-8 AN Q -MID GAIN EQ/LO IT EQ ED PAN FREQ IT EQ ED PAN Q EQ/LO GAIN IT FREQ IT Q IT IT EQ ED PAN ON SOLO IT ON SOLO EQ ED PAN ON SOLO EQ ED PAN EQ SOLO EQ ED PAN FREQ SOLO EQ ED PAN EDIT ON SOLO ON SOLO ON SOLO +10 ON 0 +10 ON 0 +10 -10 0 +10 -10 +10 The [9–16 ADAT IN] key is lit. You can control channels 9–16. -10 -10 -10 -10 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 NA ALOG IN - -40 - -40 -30 - -40 -30 EQ/HI GAIN - -40 Q MID GAIN EQ/HIALOG FREQ IN PAN 1-8 AN Q -MID GAIN EQ/LO IT EQ ED PAN IT IT SOLO EQ ED PAN Q IT IT ON SOLO EQ ED PAN ON SOLO EQ ED PAN IT ON SOLO EQ ED PAN SOLO EQ ED PAN FREQ FREQ IT EQ ED PAN FREQ Q EQ/LO GAIN IT EQ ED ON SOLO ON SOLO ON SOLO +10 ON 0 +10 ON 0 +10 -10 0 +10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 - -40 - -40 EQ/HI GAIN T SELEC IN PAGE ADAT 9-16 Q MID EQ/HIGAIN ALOG 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 19 0 11 12 A1DAT IN - -40 -40 -30 -30 N EFF RT FREQ IN PAN 1-8 AN Q -MID GAIN EQ/LO Q SOLO IT ON SOLO EQ ED PAN IT ON SOLO EQ ED PAN SOLO IT EQ ED PAN IT ON SOLO EQ ED PAN IT EQ ED PAN FREQ FREQ IT IT EQ ED PAN EQ/LO GAIN EQ ED PAN FREQ Q IT ON SOLO EQ ED ON SOLO ON SOLO +10 ON 0 +10 ON 0 +10 -10 0 +10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 - -40 - -40 - - -40 -30 -30 - -40 -30 -20 -20 - - -40 -30 -20 -40 - -40 -30 -20 -40 -30 -20 0 -30 -20 0 0 -30 -20 0 +10 +10 +10 -20 0 +10 VM200 User’s Guide - -40 -30 -20 -20 -40 -30 -20 - -30 -20 0 -40 -40 -30 -20 0 +10 -30 -20 0 +10 -30 -20 0 +10 The [17–20 EFF RTN] key is lit. You can control channels 17–20. -20 0 +10 17-20 - -40 -30 -20 -20 EFF RT -40 -30 -20 -10 N 17-20 T SELEC IN PAGE ADAT 9-16 - -30 -20 -10 -40 -30 -20 0 -40 -30 -20 0 +10 -30 -20 0 +10 +10 -20 0 0 2 9 1 8 1 17 FF RTN E 47 Getting Started Keeping It Digital Many home studios or project studios these days record to digital audio tape or hard disk recording systems, but lacking a digital mixer, they are forced to mix tracks using a conventional analog mixer. This can actually add color and warmth to some tracks, but is likely to introduce noise into the signal chain. Once an instrument or singer’s voice has been converted to digital audio by an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter, it is generally best to leave the recording in the digital domain. Running the signal back and forth through A/D and D/A converters, regardless of the quality of the converters, unnecessarily reduces the overall quality of the signal, and hence the final recording. With the VM200, you can record and mixdown entirely in the digital domain. This may make a dramatic improvement in the quality of your final recordings. An Important Note About Word Clock Information Before you can transfer digital audio from one device to another, the digital audio equipment must be word clock synchronized, or timing problems may result. For example, if you are recording to another digital device, such as an ADAT, DAT, or digital multitracker, you must synchronize all digital components in your recording system to a common word clock source. If the VM200 is the only digital component in your recording system, you do not need to adjust any word clock settings. However, if you are using other digital audio components, please refer to “Digital Connections, Word Clocks, and Sample Rates” on page 160 for more information on synchronizing to a common word clock source. Stopless Rotary Controls The VM200 uses the 12 rotary controls (also known as the Gain, Freq, and Q controls) to adjust values for several different parameters, depending on the currently-selected function page. Unlike conventional analog control knobs, the rotary controls on the VM200 are stopless; you can rotate them right or left endlessly. In this way, the knobs can more easily accommodate a broad range of parameter values. 48 VM200 User’s Guide Lower and Raise Faders to Initiate Sends Lower and Raise Faders to Initiate Sends If on occasion you think you have configured the VM200 to send a particular signal to a buss, but you unexpectedly cannot hear the output, try bringing the fader down and raising it back up to the desired level to initiate the send. This may seem unusual if you are used to analog mixers, but it is part of the channel layer structure of the VM200. Because the faders can control multiple functions depending on the displayed function page, you may need to lower and raise the faders to set new levels when you change Fader Modes. For example, after you set the level of channels 19 and 20 for an effect return, if you wish to set the effect send level on channel 3, you may need to lower the Channel 3 and Master faders once, then raise them to set the desired level. Reading the Display The LCD Display features a resolution of 256 x 64 dots. It can display numerical parameter values, and uses graphic icons to represent fader positions and rotary control settings. This section shows a few sample function pages and explains common icons and indicators. The Channel Edit Function Page Whenever you turn on the power to the VM200 or press the [CHANNEL/METER] key or the [EXIT] key, the VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. There are actually two versions of the Channel Edit page. One version shows the inputs; the other version shows the outputs. (The Channel Edit/Input version is shown below.) When you see this function page, the VM200 is in Channel Edit mode. You can think of the CHANNEL EDIT function pages as a type of “home” page. scene program number scene title channel pan settings VM200 User’s Guide selected EQ input channel meters ADD.AUX or Rec Buss channel fader levels channel number master fader level 49 Getting Started Examples of Other Function Pages The name of the function page appears in the upper-left corner. Note how the fader icons look like little faders on the following CHANNEL VIEW (CH VIEW) function page. Function Page Name Level indicator Fader icons show fader position. You use the [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], and [ON] keys to toggle two-state indicators. These indicators are represented on the display by small rectangles. An empty rectangle indicates that the parameter or option is turned “off.” A “filled” or solid dark rectangle indicates an “on” setting. (This manual also refers to darkened indicators as “highlighted,” just to confuse the tourists.) Empty rectangle means “off” Filled or dark rectangle means “on” Function Page Parameter Matrix The display frequently arranges the parameters on a function page in a matrix. One such matrix displays four rectangles in a horizontal row, with each rectangle containing a parameter. Beneath this appears another row, which contains eight rectangles, as illustrated below. On such a function page, the four Gain rotary controls adjust parameters in the top row, and the Freq and Q rotary controls adjust the parameters in the bottom row. 50 VM200 User’s Guide Lit & Flashing LED Keys EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN For example, use the EQ/LO Gain rotary control to turn the CH FADER parameter on and off. Use the EQ/HI-MID Freq rotary control to turn the EFF1 parameter on and off. Lit & Flashing LED Keys Many of the keys on the control surface of the VM200 are translucent and fixed in position over an LED light that can provide status information. In general, these keys flash when they are available for selection, and light up continuously when they are selected. (Don’t be alarmed the first time you press the Routing function key and a couple dozen lights start flashing! This is normal.) LED Condition Meaning VM200 User’s Guide dark off, deselected flashing available for selection lit on, selected 51 Getting Started Finally...Let’s Get Started! The following procedure lets you try out some of the capabilities of your VM200. To simplify the explanation, in this procedure we will connect a microphone to channel 1, adjust the EQ, apply effects, and record the signal. Making Connections This procedure assumes that you have installed and powered on the VM200. (See page 45 for more information.) 1. Connect a microphone, instrument, or other sound source to input channel 1. You can connect either: • a balanced XLR-type condenser microphone to input channel 1, connector A, and leave the Input A/B selector button on the top panel unpressed; or • a balanced/unbalanced TRS-type microphone to input channel 1, connector B, and depress the Input A/B selector button. However, you can use another sound source, such as a synthesizer keyboard or CD player, if you desire. Make sure it is powered off before you connect it to the VM200. INPUT XLR-type connector (A) A A 4 +48V 3 ON OFF +48V 2 ON OFF +48V B 1 ON OFF +48V B INSERT 4 2. A 1/4” phone connector (B) B INSERT 3 ON OFF INSERT 2 1 Connect the VM200 MONITOR OUT to an amplifier and speakers, or connect a pair of stereo headphones to the PHONES jack. You can use the Monitor Gain or Phones Gain knobs to adjust the output volume level. Lower the Gain to minimum to prevent loud noise. MONITOR OUT PHONES PHONES MONITOR OUT R L 2TRK IN R ST BUSS OUT L R REC BUSS OUT L R 4 L AUX SEND 3 2 1 ADD.AUX SEND 3. 52 Connect the ST BUSS OUT to the analog inputs of a recorder. Even though the VM200 is a digital mixer designed primarily for use with digital multitrack recorders, to simplify this brief procedure, we will connect to an analog recorder. VM200 User’s Guide Powering On 4. If you prefer, you can connect a DAT to the S/P DIF OUT or an ADAT-compatible recorder to the ADAT OUT connectors. (For more information, see “Digital Connections” on page 159.). If you just want to try out the EQ and some effects, you can skip this step (step 3) altogether. Lower all faders and Gain and Trim knobs on the VM200. Powering On 5. Press the Power button on the rear panel to turn on the power to the VM200. The VM200 banner scrolls, all keys flash, then the VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT/INPUT function page. The [1–8 ANALOG IN] Page Select key lights up red. All [ON] keys, the [CHANNEL/METER] key, and the [CHANNEL] key light up green. 6. Turn on the microphone (or other connected sound source), then turn on the power to the amplifier. If you are using an XLR-type condenser microphone connected to the XLR input, turn on the +48 phantom power to the microphone using the phantom power switch on the rear panel. Adjusting the Channel Input Make sure that the [ON] keys for channel 1 and Master are lit. If not, press the [ON] keys to turn them on. Also, make sure that the 2TRK IN button is NOT depressed. 7. While talking or singing into the microphone (or playing an alternate sound source), adjust the channel 1 Trim control, and raise the channel 1 fader and the Master fader. Notice the movement in the level meter for input channel 1 on the LCD Display, and in the ST BUSS LED meter to the right of the display. Adjust the input channel level so that the meter will not reach the “OL” (overload) level. 8. Raise the monitoring level using the Monitor Gain control for connected monitoring speakers, or the Phones Gain control for connected headphones. Set this to the desired listening level. VM200 User’s Guide 53 Getting Started Adjusting the EQ 9. Press the channel 1 [EQ EDIT] key. The [EQ EDIT] key lights up orange, and the [EQ ON] key in the Selected EQ section lights up green. If the [EQ ON] key is not lit, press the key to turn it on. The following EQ EDIT function page appears. 10. Use the EQ Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls to adjust the channel 1 EQ. Each trio of rotary controls adjusts the EQ in a separate frequency band. Use all 12 rotary controls to adjust the channel 1 EQ in each of the four bands. For example, watch the response curve swell as you raise the EQ/HI-MID Gain, as illustrated in figures A and B below. A the response curve swells when Gain is raised B 54 VM200 User’s Guide Adjusting the EQ If you lower the Freq, the soft bell-shaped curve in Figure B would move to the left, as illustrated in Figure C: C In Figures D and E below, notice how the frequency range changes and the response curve sharpens and narrows as the EQ/HI-MID Q value is raised. D E You can store EQ settings in a program, or you can recall a preset EQ program. Refer to “EQ” on page 75 for more information. VM200 User’s Guide 55 Getting Started Audition Some Effects Let’s apply some effects from the Eff2 effect processor to the signal. Press the [EFF2] key in the Eff Edit section. The [EFF2] key lights up orange and the VM200 displays the EFF EDIT function page. 12. Press the [RECALL] key in the Eff Library section. The VM200 displays the following EFFECT LIBRARY RECALL function page, and the [EFF2] key flashes. 11. Use the Data Wheel or the [>/-1] and [+1/<] keys to scroll or step through the effects list and select an effect program. Try something like the Mono Delay or a Large Hall Reverb. 14. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selection. The VM200 displays the EFF EDIT function page. 15. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. 13. 56 VM200 User’s Guide Recording Press the [17–20 EFF RTN] Page Select key. The [1–8 ANALOG IN] key LED turns off and the [17–20 EFF RTN] key lights up red. 17. Make sure that the [ON] keys for channels 19 and 20 are lit, and lower then raise the faders for channels 19 and 20 to set the effects return channel level. You must lower then raise the faders to set the return level. EFF1 is routed to EFF RTN 17 and 18, and EFF2 is routed to EFF RTN 19 and 20. 18. Make sure that the Master [ON] key is lit, then raise the Master fader to set the effects return master level. 19. Press the [1–8 ANALOG IN] Page Select key. The [17–20 EFF RTN] key LED turns off and the [1–8 ANALOG IN] Page Select key lights up. 20. Press the [EFF2] key in the Fader Mode section. The [EFF2] key flashes orange and the [AUX2] key flashes red in the Fader Mode section. (Don’t worry about the flashing [AUX2] key for the moment.) 21. Lower then raise the channel 1 fader and the Master fader to set the desired effects send signal level. As you raise the faders, you should hear the effect. You can also edit and store effects settings. Refer to “Effects” on page 123 for more information. 16. Of course, you can connect other instruments to other analog channels, or connect a DAT or CD player to the S/P DIF In connector for mixdown and recording. Recording 22. Set up your connected recorder accordingly and press the REC and PLAY button on the recorder to begin recording. You can now record your performance to the recorder. To check the input and output levels of the VM200, press the [CHANNEL/METER] key to toggle between the input and output meters. Storing a Mix Scene Once you are satisfied with the mix settings, you can save them as a scene “snapshot” in the VM200’s Scene Memory. You can also recall and edit these scenes later. Please refer to “Scene Memory” on page 147 for more information. VM200 User’s Guide 57 Getting Started 58 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Input Channels RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 4 LO About This Chapter IT ON LO ON ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO This chapter provides an overview of the VM200’s input channels, including phantom power, routing, pairing, grouping, copying channel settings, and more. LO 0 -40 - -60 6 14 -40 60 61 61 61 62 63 63 64 65 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 69 70 72 - -30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -20 -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - -40 -30 0 +1 PA I GR R/ OU P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 -10 -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 0 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -30 -10 -20 +1 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 -10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 13 -20 -10 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 12 20 -10 0 0 +1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 0 0 +1 ON ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 0 +1 ON LO SO LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -40 ON LO SO ED EQ SO -30 0 +1 0 SO LO ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - ON +1 0 LO IT EQ ED PA N SO Q FR EQ Q PA N EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 ON ED EQ ID -M N GA I /LO EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 LO IT PA N SO FR EQ EQ ED ON IT Input Channels 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channels 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channels 9–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channels 17–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Channels 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pad Switches (Input channels 1–4) . . . . TRIM Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverting the Input Phase . . . . . . . . . . Input Channel EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring and Soloing Input Channels Feeding Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Mute Channels . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Faders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Input Channel Settings . . . . . . Copying Channel Settings. . . . . . . . . . . -40 PA N 0 SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ Chapter Contents VM200 User’s Guide 59 Input Channels Input Channels 1–4 There are two sets of analog connectors for Input Channels 1 - 4. The “A” set accepts XLR-type inputs (balanced); the “B” set accepts phone jacks (balanced or unbalanced). The XLR connectors are XLR-3-32-type inputs. The phone jacks are 1/4-inch TRS-type. Both XLR and phone jack inputs accept a nominal input range of –60 dB to +10 dB. INPUT XLR inputs A A 4 +48V A 3 ON OFF +48V 2 ON OFF +48V 1 ON OFF +48V B B B INSERT INSERT INSERT phantom power switch ON OFF phone jack inputs inserts 4 3 2 1 Note: Before you set the INPUT A/B switch for input channels 1-4, lower the corresponding TRIM control to the minimum, or you will hear a clicking noise. Note: Before you turn on phantom power, lower the TRIM control for the corresponding input channel to the minimum, or turn off the power to the VM200. Note: Turn off the corresponding phantom power switch before you connect a dynamic microphone; otherwise, you may damage the microphone. If you turn on the power to the VM200 while the input channel’s phantom power switch is turned on, the VM200 displays a warning message: “Warning! +48V SW ON!” 60 VM200 User’s Guide Phantom Power for Input Channels 1–4 Phantom Power for Input Channels 1–4 The VM200 supplies optional phantom power (+48 V) to the XLR connectors. You can turn the phantom power on or off using the switches on the rear panel as shown in the figure above. Caution: Turn on the phantom power only after you connect a balanced XLR component (such as a condenser microphone) to the XLR input connector. Specify the connector you wish to use by pressing (or not pressing) the A/B input selectors on the top panel (shown in the figure below). The A setting (unpressed) selects the XLR input connector; the B setting (depressed) selects the phone jack input connector. INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 A/B Input selector A A A A B B B B PAD PAD PAD PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 26dB 26dB TRIM TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 -60 -34 Input Channels 5–8 Input channels 5–8 accept only unbalanced phone jacks. (These connectors do not accept XLR inputs or balanced analog inputs.) For more information, see “Rear Panel” on page 38. Input Channels 9–16 In addition to the analog signals you can input to channels 1 through 8, you can assign digital ADAT inputs to channels 9-16. Refer to “Digital Connections” on page 159 for more information. Input Channels 17–20 Input channels 17–20 are used for internal effect returns from the EFF1 or EFF2 effects processor. VM200 User’s Guide 61 Input Channels Insert Channels 1–4 You can use a Y-shaped insert cable to connect the VM200 to an external effects processor. The signal flows out of the VM200 Insert connector, into and out of the effects processor, and back into the VM200 via the insert cable. Tip (Send) from VM200 to Effects processor Ring (Return) from Effects processor to VM200 The Insert connectors allow you to insert a signal into the signal chain after the PAD switches and TRIM knobs. INPUT A A 4 +48V A 3 ON OFF +48V 2 ON OFF +48V 1 ON OFF +48V B B B INSERT INSERT INSERT ON OFF to FX 4 3 2 1 from FX INSERT connectors 1-4 62 VM200 User’s Guide Pad Switches (Input channels 1–4) Pad Switches (Input channels 1–4) Input channels 1 through 4 feature 26 dB Pad switches that attenuate the input signal by 26 dB. This allows the input preamp to work with hot, high-level signals, such as those from a snare drum microphone. PAD PAD 26dB PAD 26dB PAD 26dB 26dB Note: Pad switch settings are not stored in Scene Memory. TRIM Controls You can adjust the gain of the input channel preamps on input channels 1 through 4 by using the Trim controls. Your goal is to optimize the input signal level to achieve the best signal-to-noise ratio. Keep a close eye on the level meters while adjusting the Trim controls. In general, set the levels as high as possible without peaking (actually, it’s okay if the level occasionally peaks a little). If you set the level too high, the signal may distort and or clip. If it’s set too low, the output signal may sound thin or noisy. INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 A A A B B B B PAD PAD PAD PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 -34 -16 +10 TRIM -60 -34 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM 26dB TRIM -60 INPUT 6 A 26dB TRIM INPUT 5 -16 +10 -60 -10 -50 -10 -50 -10 -50 -10 -50 -34 VM200 uses “boxed” values when Pad switch is depressed. The Trim controls have an input sensitivity of –16 dB to –60 dB, which is appropriate for many microphones. However, you can press one of the Pad switches for channels 1–4 to reduce the input sensitivity for that channel to the range of +10 to –34 dB. This works well for “hot” microphone signals. The Trim controls on input channels 5–8 have a gain range of –10 dB to –50 dB. This works well with line-level signals. Note: Trim control settings are not stored in Scene Memory. VM200 UserÕs Guide 63 Input Channels Inverting the Input Phase “Phase” concerns the timing of two different signals. A pair of stereo speakers can operate “in phase” or “out of phase.” If the drivers in the left and right speakers move in and out at the same time, in perfect concert with one another, the speakers are “in phase.” If they are out of sync, they are “out of phase.” Out-of-phase speakers tend to produce a weak stereo image and low bass output. Phase is often represented by this symbol: ∅. On the VM200, you can invert the phase for channels 1–20. First you access the PHASE function page, then press an [EQ EDIT] key to turn phase inversion on or off. A light indicator on the display means phase is normal (off) for that channel; a dark (highlighted) indicator means phase is inverted (on). You can use the phase inversion software switches to compensate for balanced cables or microphones that may have been wired incorrectly, or at any time you wish to invert the phase of a channel to prevent signal cancellation. 1. Press the [ROUTING/PHASE] key repeatedly to display the 3:∅ PHASE function page. The [ROUTING/PHASE] key and the [EQ EDIT] keys for all selectable channels start to flash (indicating their availability). The 3:∅ PHASE function page includes a 1-by-20 matrix that indicates whether the phase is normal or reversed for each channel. Indicates phase is normal. 2. 3. 64 Indicates Phase is reversed. Press a Page Select key to select the target channel layer, then press the [EQ EDIT] key for any channel to reverse its phase. The [EQ EDIT] key lights up if you turn phase inversion on. Even when channels are configured as stereo pairs, their phase switches can be set independently. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. VM200 User’s Guide Input Channel EQ Input Channel EQ You can apply EQ to channels 1—16 using the four-band parametric equalizer. For more information on using the equalizer, see “EQ” on page 75. Muting Channels To mute a channel, use the Page Select keys to select the desired channel layer, then make sure the channel’s [ON] key is turned off. If channels are linked as a stereo pair (see “Pairing Channels” on page 68) you can use either channel’s [ON] key to turn the pair off (or on). You can also group input channels into Mute groups and control them as one, using a single [ON] key. (See “Grouping Mute Channels” on page 68.) Setting Channel Levels You control input channel levels using the faders. If it is not already selected, select the desired channel layer using a Page Select key, then press the channel’s [ON] key. The VM200 features seven Fader Modes. The faders control different functions and parameters depending on the current Fader Mode. You can select a Fader Mode by pressing one of the keys in the Fader Mode section, such as [AUX1], [EFF2], [CHANNEL], etc. (See “Faders” on page 32 for more information about Fader Modes.) If channels are linked as a stereo pair or group, you can set the channel level for the pair or group using any fader in the pair or group. For more information, see “Pairing Channels” on page 68. Panning Input Channels Use the eight panpot rotary controls to pan the signal between the left and right channels of the stereo output. 1. VM200 User’s Guide Make sure that the [CHANNEL/METER] key is lit. If not, press it to turn it on. 65 Input Channels The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. panpot icon 2. 3. numeric pan value hard left hard right Use the Page Select keys to select the target channel layer. Use the panpot rotary controls to make the pan settings. The display shows a dial icon for each channel that visually indicates the pan position. The display also includes numerical values—such as L2.0 or R3.7—that provide precise pan position data. If you pan hard right or hard left (that is, fully right or left), the numerical value changes to a left or right arrow to indicate that the maximum has been reached. The pan settings range from L10.0 to R10.0 in increments of 0.5 (although you’ll never see R10.0 or L10.0 indications, because these settings are the maximum value and are replaced by the arrow). Routing Input Channels You can control input channel routing by using the on/off software switches on the ROUTING function page. The ROUTING function page includes switches that can route channels 1–20 to the Rec Buss and Stereo Buss, and channels 1–8 to the ADAT Direct outputs. (You cannot route channels 9–20 to the ADAT Direct outs.) 1. 66 Press the [ROUTING/PHASE] key to display the 1:ROUTING function page. The [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], and [ON] keys start to flash (indicating their availability). The [ROUTING/PHASE] key also flashes. VM200 User’s Guide Monitoring and Soloing Input Channels 2. 3. 4. Use the Page Select keys to select the target channel layer. Press the [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] key that represents the desired routing for the target channel. See the following table: KEY TARGET ROUTING EQ EDIT ADAT DIRECT OUT SOLO REC BUS ON STEREO BUS When you press an [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] key, the key lights up and the corresponding indicator on the display turns dark (highlighted). A light empty indicator means the routing is not selected (off). If channels are configured as stereo pairs, their Routing switches are also linked. (For more information on pairing channels, see “Pairing Channels” on page 68.) Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Monitoring and Soloing Input Channels For information on monitoring input channels, see “Monitoring Signals” on page 97 Feeding Outputs REC Buss Out You can route input channels 1–20 to the Rec Buss outs. See “Using the REC BUSS OUT” on page 112 for more information. ST Buss Out You can route input channels 1–20 to the Stereo Buss outs. See “Using the ST BUSS OUT” on page 110 for more information. AUX Sends You can route input signals to Aux 1, 2, 3, or 4 by pressing the [AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], or [AUX4] key and raising the corresponding fader. (You can use Aux 3 and 4 when ADD. AUX mode is turned on.) You can also configure input channel sends as either pre-fader or post-fader. See “Using the AUX Sends” on page 115 for more information. VM200 User’s Guide 67 Input Channels Digital Outs You can select input channels 1–20 as sources for the digital outs. See “Digital Connections” on page 159 for more information. Pairing Channels You can create up to ten pairs of channels from input channels 1–20 to facilitate stereo signal processing. You can pair only adjacent odd/even channels, such as 1 and 2, 5 and 6, etc. (You cannot pair non-adjacent channels, such as 2 and 7, or even/odd pairs such as 4 and 5.) The following parameters are linked when input channels are paired: EQ, [ON], [SOLO], and [EQ EDIT] keys, faders, Aux sends, Effect sends, Pre/post settings, and Routing switches. 1. Press the [PAIR/GROUP] key to display the 1:CH PAIR function page. The [PAIR/GROUP] key and the [EQ EDIT] keys start to flash. 2. If the appropriate channel layer is not yet selected, press a Page Select key to select the desired channel layer. The selected Page Select key lights up. 3. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for one of the channels you wish to pair. The [EQ EDIT] keys for the channel pair light up. The display highlights the indicator for the channel pair. You can press a corresponding [EQ EDIT] key to cancel any stereo pair. 4. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Grouping Mute Channels You can group channels 1-20 into mute groups. This enables you to mute several channels simultaneously by pressing a single [ON] key. For example, you may wish to turn all the channels devoted to a cho- 68 VM200 User’s Guide Grouping Faders rus or drum kit on and off simultaneously during mixdown. You can group these channels into a mute group. Three groups are available: Mute Groups A, B, and C. 1. Press the [PAIR/GROUP] key twice to display the 2:MUTE GROUP function page. THE [PAIR/GROUP] key and all [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], and [ON] keys flash. 2. Press the [EQ EDIT] keys for the channels you wish to add to Mute Group A. The [EQ EDIT] keys light up and the corresponding indicators on the display turn on (highlight). In the example above, channels 5, 6, 7, and 8 are assigned to Mute Group A. (No other channels are assigned to a Mute group.) 3. Press the [SOLO] keys for the channels you wish to add to Mute Group B. The [SOLO] keys light up and the corresponding indicators on the display turn on (highlight). 4. Press the [ON] key for the channels you wish to add to Mute Group C. The [ON] keys light up and the corresponding indicators on the display turn on (highlight). 5. To remove a channel from the mute group, press the corresponding [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] key. The key resumes flashing and the corresponding display indicator turns off. 6. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Grouping Faders You can group faders 1-8 into Fader groups. This enables you to control several faders simultaneously using only one fader. Three groups are available: Mute Groups A, B, and C. 1. VM200 User’s Guide Press the [PAIR/GROUP] key repeatedly to display the 3:FADER GROUP function page. 69 Input Channels THE [PAIR/GROUP] key and all [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], and [ON] keys start to flash. In the following example, channels 2, 6, and 7 are assigned to Fader Group A. (No other channels are assigned to Fader Groups.) 2. Press the [EQ EDIT] keys for the faders you wish to add to Fader Group A. The [EQ EDIT] keys light up and the corresponding indicators on the display turn on (highlight). 3. Press the [SOLO] keys for the faders you wish to add to Fader Group B. The [SOLO] keys light up and the corresponding indicators on the display turn on (highlight). 4. Press the [ON] keys for the faders you wish to add to Fader Group C. The [ON] keys light up and the corresponding indicators on the display turn on (highlight). 5. To remove a fader from the fader group, press the corresponding [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] key. The key resumes flashing and the corresponding display indicator turns off. 6. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Viewing Input Channel Settings The CHANNEL VIEW function page enables you to view the settings for any input channel. You cannot adjust any parameters on the CHANNEL VIEW function page. (If you try to adjust the pan setting, the VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page.) 1. Press the [CH VIEW] key to display the 1:CH VIEW function page. The [CH VIEW] key and the [EQ EDIT] keys for all viewable channels flash. The selected Page Select key lights up; unselected Page Select keys flash. 70 VM200 User’s Guide Viewing Input Channel Settings 2. Press the appropriate Page Select key to select the desired channel layer. The selected Page Select key lights up; unselected Page Select keys continue to flash. 3. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for the target channel. The selected [EQ EDIT] key lights up. The number of the selected channel appears in the upper left portion of the CHANNEL VIEW function page. The following illustration describes the components of the CHANNEL VIEW function page. channel pan setting routing (Direct, Rec buss, St buss) EQ curve graphic channel number function page title channel fader level [ON] key status 4. VM200 UserÕs Guide phase aux send levels sub-page title effect send levels EQ on/off EQ numeric settings (gain, freq, Q) level meter fader group mute group Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. 71 Input Channels Copying Channel Settings You can use the Channel Copy function to copy input channel settings from one channel to another. The CHANNEL COPY function page features a 1-by-20 matrix that enables you to select one source channel, and enable or disable the other channels as copy destinations. The selected source channel is marked by an “S.” A highlighted indicator marks the channels targeted as copy destinations. A dark indicator means the channel is not selected (disabled) as a copy destination. 1. Press the [CH VIEW] key twice (from start of cycle) to display the 2:CH COPY function page. The [CH VIEW] key and the [EQ EDIT] keys for all channels flash. The selected Page Select key lights up; the unselected Page Select keys flash. 2. Press the appropriate Page Select key to select the desired channel layer. The selected Page Select key lights up; unselected Page Select keys continue to flash. 3. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for the copy source channel. You can select only one source channel to copy at a time. The selected [EQ EDIT] key lights up. The CHANNEL COPY function page marks the source channel with an “S” and prompts you to select a destination channel. 4. Press the appropriate Page Select key to specify the channel layer, then press the [EQ EDIT] key of the copy destination channel(s). You can select multiple channels as destinations. 72 VM200 User’s Guide Copying Channel Settings The selected [EQ EDIT] key(s) light up. The CHANNEL COPY function page highlights (enables) the selected destination channel(s) as follows. 5. 6. Press the [ENTER] key to execute the copy operation. The CHANNEL COPY function page flashes the word “COMPLETE!” on the display for a few seconds, and the VM200 displays the first CH COPY function page. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Note: Even if channels are paired, you can copy to and from each of the paired channels independently. VM200 User’s Guide 73 Input Channels 74 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG EQ RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 5 LO About This Chapter IT EX Q IN IT LO SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ FR ED TN PA N ON GA EQ /H I SO This chapter explains how to use the VM200 four-band parametric equalizer (EQ) and how to edit, recall, and store EQ settings. ON 0 -40 - -60 -40 76 77 80 80 81 83 83 84 86 88 90 92 - . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -20 -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . - -10 -10 . . . . . . . . . . . . - 6 14 -30 -40 5 13 -40 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - PA I GR R/ OU P 0 +1 -30 0 -20 4 12 20 -10 - -40 -30 ON 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 EQ -10 - ON 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 EQ -10 ED . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 . . . . . . . . . . . . ON IT PA N ED IT PA N . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 . . . . . . . . . . . . +1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 0 +1 . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 ON LO SO . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 ON SO LO ED IT PA N EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . +1 LO IT EQ ED PA N SO Q FR EQ Q . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 EQ ED ON IT PA N SO LO EQ ED ON IT PA N EQ FR ID -M N GA I /LO EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . SO Equalizers (EQ). . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . EQ Enabling Channels . . . . . . Bypassing the EQ . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ Preset Library List . . . . Recalling EQ Programs . . . . . . Storing EQ Programs . . . . . . . Editing EQ Program Titles . . . Copying EQ Settings. . . . . . . . EQ Preset Library Parameters. +1 LO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ ED IT PA N Chapter Contents VM200 User’s Guide 75 EQ Equalizers (EQ) The VM200 features a four-band parametric equalizer for input channels 1–16. The four-band equalizer subdivides the audio spectrum into LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, and HI frequency ranges. Each of the four bands includes rotary controls for Gain, Frequency, and Q. The LO-MID and HI-MID bands use parametric EQ. The LO band can function as an HPF, shelving, or parametric EQ; the HI band can function as an LPF, shelving, or parametric EQ. The Gain control adjusts the amount of increase in a signal, generally measured in decibels (dB). The Frequency control specifies the number of cycles-per-second of a waveform (in our case, soundwaves). The Q control adjusts the sharpness of the EQ peak response. The LO band Q can function as a high-pass filter (HPF), and HI band Q can function as a low-pass filter (LPF). A low-pass filter (LPF) rejects signals above a certain cut-off frequency while passing lower-frequency signals through. A high-pass filter (HPF) rejects signals below a certain cut-off frequency while passing higher-frequency signals through. In a shelving-type (SHLV) EQ, the boosted or cut-off frequencies form a shelf-shape on a frequency response curve. A high-frequency shelf affects signals at and higher than the specified frequency; a low frequency shelf affects signals at and higher than the specified frequency. The EQ EDIT function page displays a graphic EQ response curve for channels 1 - 16. The EQ response curve provides visual feedback to help you shape the EQ, while the numerical read-outs ensure extremely accurate settings that you can store in the EQ Library and later recall. The EQ Library consists of 50 Preset programs and 50 User programs. You can store EQ settings into User programs, or into Scene Memory along with all other mix settings. You can also recall EQ settings from the Preset programs or User programs, or from Scene Memory along with all other mix settings. The Presets are a special collection of EQ settings that can be useful in a variety of situations. See “EQ Preset Library List” on page 83. You can also use the Presets as templates that you can customize to create your own EQ settings. You can name and store up to 50 of your favorite EQ settings as User programs. If channels are configured as a stereo pair, their EQs are linked. The EQ parameters and response curve for input channels 1 through 76 VM200 User’s Guide Adjusting the EQ 16 appear on the EQ EDIT function page, as shown below: EQ On indicator Adjusting the EQ You can adjust the EQ for each of the four bands using three rotary controls: Gain, Freq, and Q. These three EQ controls form a triangular shape on the top panel of the VM200. The LCD display also features four sets of three circular knob icons. Each set of three is arranged in a triangle that corresponds to the hardware EQ rotary controls. (That is, Gain is on top, Freq is on the lower-left, and Q is on the lower-right.) Note that in EQ Edit mode, the Pan rotary controls adjust Freq and Q. EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID GAIN 1. 2. 3. VM200 User’s Guide EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN Make sure that the [CHANNEL/METER] key is lit. Otherwise, press it to turn it on. Press a Page Select key to specify a channel layer, such as [1-8 ANALOG IN] key. The selected Page Select key lights up red. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for the channel whose EQ you wish to edit. 77 EQ The selected [EQ EDIT] key lights up and the VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page. 4. Press the [EQ ON] key in the Selected EQ section to turn it on. The [EQ ON] key lights up, and the VM200 turns on the EQ for the selected channel. The EQ On/Off indicator in the lower-right corner of the display shows “On” to indicate that the EQ is turned on for the specified channel. Note: Be aware that the EQ may not turn on for certain channels if the EQ Enable parameter setting is incorrect. The EQ Enable parameter appears on the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. See “EQ Enabling Channels” on page 80 for more information. 5. Use the rotary controls (Gain, Freq, and Q) to adjust the Frequency, Gain, and Q parameters. The display shows a graphic frequency response curve. You can watch a bell-shaped curve swell as you increase the gain, or drop below the mid-line when you reduce the gain.For example, watch the response curve swell as you raise the EQ/HI-MID Gain, as illustrated in figures A and B below. A the response curve swells when Gain is raised B 78 VM200 User’s Guide Adjusting the EQ If you lower the Freq, the soft bell-shaped curve in Figure B would move to the left, as illustrated in Figure C: bell moves left C In Figures D and E below, notice how the frequency range is reduced and the response curve sharpens and narrows as the EQ/HI-MID Q value is raised. D E If you select HPF or LPF for LO band Q or HI band Q respectively, the Gain rotary control for LO EQ or HI EQ functions as the On/Off switch. The following table shows the VM200 EQ specifications. Lo Q Hi-Mid Hi –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)1 Gain (G) Frequency (F) Lo-Mid 20.3 Hz–4.00 kHz (240 steps per 1/24 octave) HPF, 0.1–20 (45 steps), Lo-shelf 500Hz–20.3kHz (240 steps per 1/24 octave) 0.1–20 (45 steps) LPF, 0.1–20 (45 steps), Hi-shelf 1. When the LO and HI EQ bands are configured as HPF and LPF, their gain controls function as filter on and off switches. VM200 UserÕs Guide 79 EQ EQ Enabling Channels You can enable the EQ for three groups of channels: 1–8, 9–16, or 1–16. (The default setting enables the EQs for channels 1–8.) 1. Press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key. The CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page appears. Notice the EQ Enable parameter in the upper-left corner. 2. Turn the channel 1/2 Gain rotary control to select 1–8, 9–16, or 1–16 for the EQ Enable parameter. The selected value flashes. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection. The VM200 displays the selected value for the EQ Enable parameter. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. 3. 4. Bypassing the EQ You can turn a channel’s EQ on or off (bypass) using the [EQ ON] key. While the target channel is selected (by pressing a Page Select key and the channel’s [EQ EDIT] key), press the [EQ ON] key to toggle between EQ On and Off. When the EQ is on, a highlighted “ON” indicator appears in the lower-right corner of the EQ EDIT function page. If the EQ is bypassed, “OFF” appears in the same location. 1. 2. 3. 80 Press the [1–8 ANALOG IN] or [9–16 ADAT IN] Page Select key to select a channel layer. The selected Page Select key lights up. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for the channel whose EQ you wish to turn on or off. The selected [EQ EDIT] key lights up and the VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page. Press the [EQ ON] key in the Selected EQ section. The [EQ ON] key lights up, and the VM200 turns on the EQ for the selected channel. VM200 User’s Guide Resetting the EQ 4. The EQ On/Off indicator in the lower-right corner of the display displays “On” to indicate that the EQ is turned on for the specified channel. To turn the EQ off for the channel, press the [EQ ON] key again. The [EQ ON] key turns off (goes dark), and the VM200 turns off the EQ for the selected channel. The EQ On/Off indicator in the lower-right corner of the display displays “Off” to indicate that the EQ is turned off for the specified channel. EQ On/Off indicator. Here, EQ is bypassed. Resetting the EQ To reset all EQ parameters for the selected channel to their initial values, follow the steps below. The following table shows initial EQ values. Gain (G) Frequency (F) Q 1. 2. 3. VM200 User’s Guide Lo Lo-Mid Hi-Mid Hi 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 125 Hz 500Hz 2.00 kHz 8.00 kHz L-S(Lo-Shelf) 1.0 1.0 H-S(Hi-Shelf) Press the [EQ EDIT] key of the channel whose EQ you wish to reset to the initial value. The [EQ EDIT] key lights up and the EQ EDIT function page appears. While pressing and holding down the [ENTER] key, press the [EQ EDIT] key. The following confirmation dialog appears on the display. Press the [ENTER] key to proceed, or press the [EXIT] key to cancel the reset operation. 81 EQ 4. 82 If you have pressed the [ENTER] key, all EQ parameters for the channel will be reset to the initial values. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. VM200 User’s Guide EQ Library EQ Library You can store EQ settings as programs in the EQ Library. The EQ Library contains 50 preset programs (Preset Library: 0–49) and 50 user programs (User Library: 50–99). For information on recalling EQ programs, see “Recalling EQ Programs” on page 84. For information on storing a new or modified EQ program, see “Storing EQ Programs” on page 86. EQ Preset Library List VM200 User’s Guide # Name # Name 00 01 Flat_EQ 25 Real_Pf LightKick 26 E.Pf 02 TightKick 27 Clean_EG 03 Loud_Kick 28 Crunch_EG 04 Ana.Kick 29 OverDrvEG 05 Snappy_SD 30 Dist.EG 06 Power_SD 31 Metal_EG 07 Deep_SD 32 Stroke_AG 08 Talk_Tom 33 StrokeEAG 09 Melo.Tom 34 Arpeg.GG 10 W.GongTom 35 Arpeg.EAG 11 Brill.Cym 36 Arpeg.AG 12 Lo-Fi_Cym 37 Brass_Sec 13 Vivid_HH 38 W.WingSec 14 Sharp_HH 39 Male_Vo1 15 Lo-Fi_HH 40 Male_Vo2 16 Perc. 41 FemaleVo1 17 Tamb. 42 FemaleVo2 18 Fat_Bass 43 Chorus 19 Norm.Bass 44 Speech_1 20 Loud_Bass 45 Speech_2 21 PowerBass 46 Digi.Mix 22 Bright_Pf 47 AnalogMix 23 Loud_Pf 48 Telephone 24 Power_Pf 49 Husky 83 EQ Recalling EQ Programs You can recall EQ programs from the EQ Library, which includes 50 Preset programs and 50 User programs. 1. Press the [1–8 ANALOG IN] or [9–16 ADAT IN] Page Select key to select the desired channel layer. The selected Page Select key lights up. Note: Make sure you select the “EQ Enabled” channel layer. For more information, see “EQ Enabling Channels” on page 75. 2. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for the channel to which you want to recall an EQ setting. The selected [EQ EDIT] key lights up. The VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page, which shows the parameter settings for the selected channel. indicates EQ parameter settings for Channel 3 3. 4. Press the Selected EQ [EQ ON] key to turn it on. Press the EQ Library [RECALL] key. The VM200 displays the EQ LIBRARY RECALL function page. The [EQ EDIT] key for the selected channel flashes. scrollable list of EQ programs 5. 6. 84 Rotate the Data Wheel or use the [] keys to select an EQ program. EQ Program names and numbers (00 to 99) scroll in the upper-right of the display. Press the [ENTER] key to recall the desired EQ Program. The VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page, which shows the new EQ parameter values applied to the current channel. VM200 User’s Guide Recalling EQ Programs 7. 8. VM200 User’s Guide To recall an EQ program for another channel, press the [EQ EDIT] key of the destination channel, then repeat Steps 2 through 5. Press the [EXIT] key at any time to exit the EQ Library Recall page and return to the CHANNEL EDIT function page. 85 EQ Storing EQ Programs You can store new EQ settings as EQ programs in the EQ Library. You can store EQ settings as User programs 50 through 99. (Programs 0 through 49 are read-only Presets.) 1. Press the EQ Library [STORE] key to display the EQ LIBRARY STORE function page. The [EQ EDIT] key of the selected channel flashes. 2. Rotate the Data Wheel or use the [] keys to select an EQ program location (from 50 to 99, inclusive). EQ Program names and numbers (50 to 99) scroll in the upper-right of the display. Note: EQ program locations that contain no data are labeled “(No Data)”. 3. Press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 displays the EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page. character-selector cursor character selector box title box The EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page includes a character selector box that displays all the letters of the alphabet, as well as numerals and punctuation symbols. You can use these characters to name or title your EQ program. You can use any trio of Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls to select the characters for the title. The Gain control moves the cursor left and right in the title box. The Freq control moves the character-selector up and down the matrix; the Q control moves the character-selector left and right. 86 VM200 User’s Guide Storing EQ Programs 4. 5. Use the Freq and Q controls to select a character, then turn the Gain control one notch to the right to move the cursor to the next space in the name, and repeat the process. The very useful “Space to End” option in the character selector box will fill-in the remainder of your title with blank spaces. When you’ve finished naming the program, press the [ENTER] key to store the EQ program. The following warning dialog appears for a brief moment, followed by the EQ EDIT function page. Warning: Do not power off the VM200 while it is writing to memory or you may damage the system. 6. VM200 User’s Guide Press the [EXIT] key any time to exit the EQ LIBRARY STORE or EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT function pages. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. 87 EQ Editing EQ Program Titles You can edit EQ program titles, just in case you want to change its name for some reason. To do so, you recall the target EQ program to a channel, then store it again with a different title. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 88 Select a channel to which you wish to recall the EQ program you are going to rename by pressing the channel [EQ EDIT] key. The VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page. Press the EQ Library [RECALL] key to display the EQ LIBRARY RECALL function page. The [EQ EDIT] key of the selected channel flashes. Rotate the Data Wheel or use the [] keys to select an EQ program you wish to rename. You cannot change the names of Preset programs 00–49. Press the [ENTER] key to recall the desired EQ Program. The VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page, which shows the recalled EQ parameter values applied to the current channel. Press the EQ Library [STORE] key to display the EQ LIBRARY STORE function page. The VM200 highlights the selected EQ program name and number. VM200 User’s Guide Editing EQ Program Titles 6. Press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 displays the EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page. The title box shows the program number, but the name is now blank. character-selector 7. cursor character selector box title box Use any Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls to re-assign a name to the EQ program. Refer to “Storing EQ Programs” on page 86 for more information on controlling the cursor and character selector. When you’ve finished re-naming the program, press the [ENTER] key to store the new EQ program title. The VM200 displays the EQ EDIT function page. WARNING: Do not power off the VM200 while it is writing to memory or you may damage the system. 8. VM200 User’s Guide Press the [EXIT] key at any time to exit the EQ LIBRARY STORE or EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT function pages. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. 89 EQ Copying EQ Settings You can use the EQ Copy function to copy EQ settings from one channel to another. The EQ COPY function page features a 1-by-20 matrix that enables you to select one source channel EQ, and enable or disable the other channels as copy destinations. The selected source channel EQ is marked by an “S.” A highlighted indicator marks the channels targeted as copy destinations. A dark indicator means the channel is not selected (disabled) as a copy destination. 1. Press the [CH VIEW] key twice (from start of cycle). The VM200 displays the 3:EQ COPY function page. The [CH VIEW] key and the [EQ EDIT] keys for all channels flash. The selected Page Select key lights up; unselected Page Select keys flash. 2. Press the appropriate Page Select key to select the desired channel layer. The selected Page Select key lights up; unselected Page Select keys continue to flash. 3. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for the EQ copy source channel. You can select only one source channel EQ to copy at a time. The selected [EQ EDIT] key lights up. The EQ COPY function page marks the source channel with an “S” and prompts you to select a destination channel. 90 VM200 User’s Guide Copying EQ Settings 4. Press the appropriate Page Select key to specify the channel layer, then press the [EQ EDIT] key of the copy destination channel(s). You can select multiple channels as EQ copy destinations. The selected [EQ EDIT] key(s) light up. The EQ COPY function page highlights (enables) the selected destination channel(s) as follows. source channel 5. 6. oneof four destination channels Press the [ENTER] key to execute the copy operation. The EQ COPY function page flashes the word “COMPLETE!” on the display for a few seconds, and the VM200 displays the first CH COPY function page. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Note: Even if channels are paired, you can copy to and from each of the paired channels independently. VM200 User’s Guide 91 EQ EQ Preset Library Parameters # 00 Flat_EQ 01 LightKick 02 TightKick 03 Loud_Kick 04 Ana.Kick 05 Snappy_SD 06 Power_SD 07 Deep_SD 08 Talk_Tom 09 Melo.Tom 10 W.GongTom 11 Brill.Cym 12 Lo-Fi_Cym 92 Parameter Name Lo Lo-Mid Hi-Mid Hi Gain 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB Freq. .125 500 2.00K 8.00K Q L-S 1.0 1.0 H-S Gain +4.0 -12.0 +4.0 0.0 Freq. 105 324 4.12K 8.00K Q 1.6 11 0.40 HS Gain +8.0 -7.5 +6.5 ON Freq. 70.2 364 2.83K 13.5K Q 1.1 5.0 2.8 LPF Gain +4.5 -6.5 +5.0 +4.0 Freq. 102 306 1.46K 6.35K Q 1.0 3.2 4.5 H-S Gain +5.5 +1.0 -6.0 -1.5 Freq. 102 91.0 2.12K 12.7K Q L-S 5.0 7.9 H-S Gain -4.5 0.0 _3.5 +4.0 Freq. 111 841 3.89K 8.23K Q L-S 3.5 0.16 H-S Gain +2.0 -9.5 +3.5 +4.5 Freq. 149 281 2.45K 5.04K Q L-S 11 0.45 0.13 Gain 0.0 +3.0 +4.0 0.0 Freq. 125 545 4.24K 8.00K Q L-S 4.5 2.2 H-S Gain +9.5 -10.0 +9.0 +2.0 Freq. 102 687 4.36K 10.7K Q 2.0 6.3 1.4 H-S Gain -10.0 +2.0 +2.5 0.0 Freq. 83.4 216 5.50K 8.00K Q L-S 4.5 1.1 H-S Gain -12.00 +10.00 -8.0 -12.0 Freq. .125 500 3.78K 8.00K Q L-S 5.0 11 H-S Gain -6.0 -1.0 0.0 +7.0 Freq. 55.7 397 1.94K 5.66K Q L-S 8.9 1.0 H-S Gain 0.0 +2.5 -4.0 -&.0 Freq. 40.5 172 3.27K 4.00K Q L-S 3.2 11 H-S Description A flat equalizing pattern used for initialized EQ. Relatively light and nimble kick sound. Creates a peak around 70Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound. Emphasizes the attack of the beat, increasing the mass of the entire kick. Makes an analog kick sound more boomy. Emphasizes snare sounds. Adds powerful thrust and clarifies snare sound. Creates a heavy-weight snare sound with great depth. Creates the “leathery” decay of a tom. Creates a melodious atmosphere by limiting the body resonance of a tom. Creates a wooden tom sound. Creates a “sparkling” and brilliant cymbal sound. Emphasizes the mid to low range to muffle “sparkling” part of cymbals. VM200 User’s Guide EQ Preset Library Parameters # 13 Vivid_HH 14 Sharp_HH 15 Lo-Fi_HH 16 Perc. 17 Tamb. 18 Fat_Bass 19 Norm.Bass 20 Loud_Bass 21 PowerBass 22 Bright_Pf 23 Loud_Pf 24 Power_Pf 25 Real_Pf VM200 User’s Guide Parameter Name Lo Lo-Mid Hi-Mid Hi Gain -7.5 -2.5 +4.0 +4.0 Freq. 93.6 472 2.31K 8.00K Q L-S 0.79 1.0 H-S Gain -9.0 -6.5 +4.5 +3.5 Freq. 68.2 771 7.13K 16.0K Q L-S 5.6 10 0.10 Gain -2.5 0.0 +4.5 -18.0 Freq. 93.6 472 2.31K 8.00K Q L-S 0.79 0.71 H-S Gain -4.0 0.0 +1.0 +7.0 Freq. 102 397 1.94K 5.82K Q L-S 4.5 0.35 H-S Gain -5.0 -0.5 +1.0 +2.5 Freq. 125 375 3.17K 8.00K Q L-S 2.5 10 H-S Gain 0.0 +4.5 +2.5 +0.5 Freq. 99.2 105 2.38K 4.24K Q L-S 0.10 6.3 H-S Gain -9.0 +4.5 +3.5 0.0 Freq. 31.3 105 2.12K 4.24K Q L-S 5.0 0.40 H-S Gain +3.5 0.0 +2.5 0.0 Freq. 121 182 1.26K 12.0K Q 2.0 7.9 2.2 H-S Gain +6.0 +3.0 0.0 0.0 Freq. 83.4 917 4.00K 8.00K Q L-S 7.9 3.2 H-S Gain -4.0 0.0 +2.5 +5.0 Freq. 81.8 375 2.45K 8.98K Q L-S 3.2 1.6 H-S Gain +5.5 -9.0 +2.5 +4.5 Freq. 187 578 3.27K 5.34K Q 3.5 10 3.2 H-S Gain -8.5 -5.5 +4.5 +9.0 Freq. 28.7 273 3.17K 8.23K Q L-S 1.0 6.3 3.5 Gain -4.5 +8.0 +1.0 -10.0 Freq. 51.1 397 1.54K 8.00K Q L-S 4.5 5.6 H-S Description Emphasizes the presence of a high-hat in the ensemble. Creates a tight high-hat with stiff and powerful characteristics. Eliminates metallic elements and emphasizes lo-fi high-hat sound. Emphasizes the attack and clarifies the high-range of instruments, such as congas, and bongos. Creates a subtle essence by emphasizing the presence of a tambourine. Makes an electric bass sound fatter by emphasizing the low range. Makes an all-round electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies. Use for analog bass with boosted low limit and attack ranges. Use on a PCM bass with boosted low range. Use to make a piano sound brighter. Adds “weight” to the low range of a piano sound with lots of harmonics. Use on a piano solo to add tightness and spread. Simulates a real mid-range piano sound, including the hammer action during key strokes. 93 EQ # 26 E.Pf 27 Clean_EG 28 Crunch_EG 29 OverDrvEG 30 Dist.EG 31 Metal_EG 32 Stroke_AG 33 StrokeEAG 34 Arpeg.GG 35 Arpeg.EAG 36 Arpeg.AG 37 Brass_Sec 38 W.WingSec 94 Parameter Name Lo Lo-Mid Hi-Mid Hi Gain -6.5 +5.5 +3.5 +10.5 Freq. 22.1 243 3.56K 20.2K Q L-S 5.0 16 H-S Gain +3.0 -6.5 +1.0 +3.5 Freq. 216 386 1.46K 5.34K Q 0.22 10 6.3 H-S Gain +3.0 0.0 +3.5 +3.0 Freq. 140 500 2.00K 5.19K Q 7.9 1.0 0.89 7.1 Gain +3.5 +2.0 +3.0 0.0 Freq. 108 375 2.59K 8.00K Q 7.9 0.50 0.20 H-S Gain +5.5 0.0 +4.0 0.0 Freq. 364 917 3.56K 8.00K Q L-S 7.9 10 H-S Gain +6.5 -9.5 +5.0 +4.0 Freq. 250 1.12K 4.49K 12.0K Q L-S 10 4.0 H-S Gain -3.0 0.0 +1.5 +5.5 Freq. 125 794 1.94K 7.13K Q 1.0 3.2 2.8 H-S Gain -4.0 -3.0 0.0 +2.5 Freq. 250 687 2.00K 4.49K Q L-S 8.9 1.0 H-S Gain -3.0 -3.0 +4.0 +2.5 Freq. 149 223 3.08K 8.00K Q L-S 4.0 5.6 H-S Gain -1.5 0.0 0.0 +3.0 Freq. 210 1.00K 3.78K 9.42K Q L-S 4.0 4.0 0.10 Gain 0.0 -6.5 0.0 +5.0 Freq. 149 530 2.52K 4.24K Q L-S 7.1 4.5 H-S Gain -2.5 0.0 +2.0 +4.0 Freq. 96.4 917 2.52K 5.66K Q 2.5 1.6 0.79 5.0 Gain +3.0 +4.0 0.0 0.0 Freq. 125 257 3.38K 8.00K Q L-S 2.2 2.5 H-S Description Emphasizes the attack and distortion of popular electric piano’s key strokes. Use for a clean electric guitar to get a brighter sound. Emphasizes the presence and adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound. Emphasizes the mid range of mellow overdrive electric guitar to add fatness and richness. Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer. Emphasizes the edge of high-gain metal sound. Emphasizes the bright chordal strokes of an acoustic guitar, reducing the body resonance. Use on a tight electric-acoustic guitar in a band context. Corrects and clarifies the arpeggio technique of a gutsy guitar sound. Adjusts the balance of chords & arpeggios of an electric acoustic guitar sound. Cuts the body resonance of an acoustic guitar sound and clarifies an arpeggio guitar sound. Adjusts the balance of brass section sound (such as trumpets and trombones). Emphasizes the rich mid-range of wind instruments, such as clarinets and oboes. VM200 User’s Guide EQ Preset Library Parameters # 39 Male_Vo1 40 Male_Vo2 41 FemaleVo1 42 FemaleVo2 43 Chorus 44 Speech_1 45 Speech_2 46 Digi.Mix 47 AnalogMix 48 Telephone 49 Husky VM200 User’s Guide Parameter Name Lo Lo-Mid Hi-Mid Hi Gain -1.0 0.0 +2.0 +3.0 Freq. 157 1.00K 2.00K 6.17K Q L-S 4.5 0.56 H-S Gain +2.5 -4.0 -2.0 +4.5 Freq. 140 243 2.59 6.73K Q L-S 7.9 3.2 H-S Gain -2.0 +1.5 +2.0 +3.0 Freq. 121 408 2.59K 8.72K Q L-S 0.45 0.63 H-S Gain -7.0 +2.0 +2.5 +3.5 Freq. 118 324 2.06K 6.73K Q L-S 0.20 0.22 H-S Gain -3.0 -0.5 +1.0 +3.5 Freq. 99.2 817 2.12K 5.34K Q 3.2 2.2 0.71 7.9 Gain -4.5 -1.5 +1.5 0.0 Freq. 99.2 687 2.59K 8.00K Q 4.5 7.1 0.71 H-S Gain -5.0 -2.0 +3.5 0.0 Freq. 55.7 229 2.67K 8.00K Q L-S 3.5 1.0 H-S Gain +6.0 0.0 0.0 +6.0 Freq. 51.1 420 4.00K 12.0K Q L-S 1.0 1.0 H-S Gain ON -7.0 -7.0 ON Freq. 33.1 57.3 6.54K 10.7K Q HPF 3.5 1.4 LPF Gain ON 0.0 +12.0 ON Freq. 420 500 1.00K 2.52K Q HPF 1.0 5.0 LPF Gain ON -5.5 +2.0 +8.0 Freq. 102 172 4.62K 8.00K Q HPF 1.0 0.32 H-S Description Adds changes to expression male of tenor vocals. Adds changes to expression of bass and baritone male vocal sound Adds changes to expression of soprano female vocal sound. Adds changes to expression of alto female vocal sound. Adds changes to expression of the entire high-tone chorus part. Use to record clear male narration. Use to record clear female narration. Use to record from classic analog 6mm or cassette tape to make the sound clearer, like digital audio. Cuts the high range to obtain the reverse effects of program 45. Emphasizes only the mid range to simulate a telephone sound. Emphasizes only the high range to creates a husky voice. 95 EQ 96 VM200 User’s Guide R MA X 0 IN G Monitoring Signals RE CA LL RE CA LL ST OR E L IB RA RY SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON RE C B SO USS LO SO LO EX IT EQ /H I GA IN 7 ON15 EQ-30 E -40DIT PA N ON SO LO ED IT PA N 17 FR EQ -20 EF F RT N ON ON This chapter explains how to monitor signals on the VM200, including selecting a monitor output, soloing, using the two-track input, as well as viewing meters and send levels. Q -9 SOLO SOLO 8 16 RE CA LL -40 ST L BU SS R /SO LO -24 -36 About This Chapter ON SOLO -12 -18 -6 EQ ON SOLO OL -3 ST OR E EF FL IB RA RY EF FE EF F1 EXIT SOLO REC BUSS DI GI TA L DI T RE EF F2 CO RECALL RD VM 20 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 6 0 SO LO -20 ON ED IT -40 -10 - 0 ON -20 0 -30 -40 +1 0 -40 SO LO -10 - ON ED IT -40 -20 0 -30 +1 0 -10 - ON -30 0 6 14 -4 0 4 12 20 -20 0 -30 -40 +1 0 10 - -40 -30 11 19 -20 3 -10 0 +1 EFF1 0 ADD.AUX CHANNEL AUX4 AUX3 EFF2 AUX2 AUX1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ MODE FADER R SE ND PA I GR R/ OU P MM C CH VIEW MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER -10 - ON 0 -30 +1 0 SO LO -20 5 13 - -10 - -40 -30 -20 -10 ON 0 -30 -40 1 9 +1 0 SO LO -20 EQ -10 - ON -40 -20 2 10 18 +1 0 SO LO ED IT PA N ED IT EQ PA N ON SOLO -60 +1 0 SO LO -30 EQ ED IT EQ ED IT Q ON SOLO EQ PA N SO LO FR EQ ON SOLO EQ PA N +10 Q EQ /LO -M ID GA IN ON SOLO -10 PA N Monitoring and Soloing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 MON SEL Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 SOLO MODE Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Two Track Input (2TRK IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Soloing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Metering Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Viewing Input/Output Level Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 LED Display Meter (L/R or ST BUSS/SOLO) . . . . . . . . . 106 Viewing Individual Channel, Aux Send, and Effect Send Meters106 PA N FR EQ 9-1 SOLO AG EON SE 6A LE CT DA TI N Q EQ /H I-M ID GA IN EQ Chapter Contents VM200 User’s Guide 97 Monitoring Signals Monitoring and Soloing The flexible monitoring and soloing capabilities of the VM200 enable you to use the mixer in a wide range of applications. The monitoring functions enable you to listen to input channel signals or buss signals through connected monitor speakers or headphones. The soloing function enables you to select the channels you want to hear while excluding all other channels. This lets you focus your attention on certain tracks in the mix. For example, say you want to listen closely to the way the rhythm section is working in a mix. The solo function lets you “solo” the channels that carry the bass and drums, while excluding the channels dedicated to the other instruments. You specify the channels you want to hear by pressing the corresponding channel [SOLO] keys on the top panel. The Setup:System 1:CLOCK/MON function page features two parameters that control the monitoring and soloing functions of the VM200: the MON SEL (monitor select) and SOLO MODE parameters. You can display the 1:CLOCK/MON function page by pressing the [SYSTEM] key. MON SEL parameter SOLO MODE parameter MON SEL Parameter The Mon Sel (Monitor Select) parameter enables you to select the source for the MONITOR OUT and PHONES jack. (However, if a channel is “soloed,” it will override the selection of the Mon Sel parameter.) You can select one of the following sources: ST-B (stereo buss), REC-B (record buss), AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, EFF1, EFF2, AUX1&2, or AUX3&4. For more information on these options, see “Monitoring” on page 100. SOLO MODE Parameter The Solo Mode parameter enables you to configure the solo function of the VM200. You can solo input channels 1 through 20 and the buss outs by 98 VM200 User’s Guide Monitor Outs and Phones pressing the [SOLO] key for the desired channel. Two Solo modes are available: PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) and M–SOLO (Mix Solo). See “Soloing” on page 101 for more information. Monitor Outs and Phones You can output Monitor and Solo signals via the MONITOR OUT and PHONES jacks. Make sure the 2TRK IN switch is not pressed in for monitoring (unless you want to confidence monitor), or you will not hear a signal. (See 2TRK IN, below, for more information.) You can connect a monitor system (amplifier and speakers) to the MONITOR OUT phono jacks on the rear panel. You can use the Monitor Gain control, located at the top right of the control surface, to adjust the level of the monitor out signal. You can connect a pair of stereo headphones to the PHONES stereo (TRS) phone jack. The PHONES signal is the same as the MONITOR OUT signal. You can adjust the level of the phones signal using the Phones Gain control. MONITOR PHONES 2TRK IN GAIN MONITOR Gain MIN GAIN MAX MIN MAX PHONES Gain (top panel} Two Track Input (2TRK IN) If you press the 2TRK IN switch on the top panel, you can monitor signals that are connected to the 2TRK IN jacks on the rear panel. The signal is sent to the MONITOR OUT and PHONES jacks. You can connect the stereo outputs of a master recorder, for example, to the 2TRK IN jacks for confidence monitoring or master playback. The 2TRK IN accepts phono jacks with a –10 dBV nominal input level. MONITOR PHONES 2TRK IN 2TRK IN GAIN 2TRK IN switch MIN R GAIN MAX MIN L MAX 2TRK IN jacks (rear panel) VM200 User’s Guide 99 Monitoring Signals Monitoring You can monitor the following sources: Stereo Buss, Rec Buss, Aux1, Aux2, Aux3, Aux4, Eff1, Eff2, Aux 1&2, or Aux 3&4. (AUX 3 and 4 are available only when the ADD. AUX parameter is turned on. For more information, see page 115.) You can select a monitor source using the monitor select (Mon Sel) parameter on the first SYSTEM function page. Follow these steps: 1. Make sure a monitoring system (amp and speakers) is con- nected to the MONITOR OUT jacks, or that stereo headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Also, make sure the 2TRK IN switch is not pressed in. 2. Set the Monitor Gain control to about halfway. (For headphones, set the Phones Gain control to about halfway.) 3. Press the Setup [SYSTEM] key. The VM200 displays the 1:CLOCK/MON function page. 4. Rotate the channel 3/4 (EQ/LO-MID) Gain rotary control to select the desired source for the Mon Sel parameter. EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN MONITOR SELECT (MON. SEL.) PARAMETER OPTIONS ST-B Stereo Buss (default setting) REC-B Record Buss AUX1 Auxiliary 1 AUX2 Auxiliary 2 AUX3 Auxiliary 3 AUX4 Auxiliary 4 EFF1 Effect processor EFF1 EFF2 Effect processor EFF2 AUX1&2 Auxiliary 1 and Auxiliary 2 mixed AUX3&4 Auxiliary 3 and Auxiliary 4 mixed 5. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] or [EXIT] key. The VM200 exits Setup mode and displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. 100 VM200 User’s Guide Soloing Soloing A Solo function is available for input channels 1 through 20 that enables you to monitor specific channels. Two solo modes are available: PFL and M-Solo. PFL is an abbreviation for Pre-Fader Listen, in which you can monitor a signal that appears before it is adjusted by the fader. M-Solo means “mix solo,” which enables you to momentarily monitor the stereo buss signal (i.e., the mix). You can select a solo mode by using the Solo Mode parameter on the first SETUP:SYSTEM function page. You can also control how [SOLO] keys are turned on and off. To use the Solo function, follow the steps below: 1. Make sure a monitoring system (amp and speakers) is con- nected to the MONITOR OUT jacks, or that stereo headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Also, make sure the 2TRK IN switch is not pressed in. 2. Set the Monitor Gain control to about halfway. (If you are using headphones, set the Phones Gain control to about halfway.) 3. Press the Setup [SYSTEM] key. The VM200 displays the 1:CLOCK/MON function page. 4. Rotate the channel 5/6 (EQ/HI-MID) Gain rotary control to select the desired Solo Mode. EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN SOLO MODE PARAMETER OPTIONS VM200 User’s Guide PFL Pre-Fader Listen mode (default setting) M-SOLO Mix-solo mode 101 Monitoring Signals PFL: In PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) mode, the VM200 feeds a soloed channel’s pre-fader signal to the Solo buss and then outputs it only to the MONITOR OUT and PHONES. Pressing the appropriate [SOLO] key enables you to solo the stereo master or Rec Buss signal before it is adjusted by the Master Fader or Rec Buss Gain parameter. You can use this mode to monitor individual input signals during a recording session to make isolated EQ adjustments or to ensure that the signals are not clipping. You can solo input channels that are turned off (i.e., that have their [ON] keys turned off). M-Solo: In Mix-Solo mode, the VM200 feeds a soloed channel to the stereo buss, and then outputs it to the ST BUSS OUT, MONITOR OUT, and PHONES. You can solo only channels that are routed to the Stereo Buss. The VM200 mutes all channels except the channel you select to solo. (However, you can use a Solo Safe function in this mode. For more information, see “Solo Safe Function” on page 104.) In this mode, Master and Rec Buss [SOLO] keys are disabled. You can use this mode to adjust individual channels during mixdown. 5. Rotate the channel 7/8 (EQ/HI) Gain rotary control to select a Solo Key mode. EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN SOLO KEY PARAMETER OPTIONS LATCH In Latch mode, when you press a [SOLO] key, it remains depressed, and the channel continues to solo until you press the key again. This is the default setting. UNLATCH In Unlatch mode, when you press and hold a [SOLO] key, it remains depressed, and the channel continues to solo until you release the key. 6. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] or [EXIT] key. The VM200 exits Setup mode and displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. 102 VM200 User’s Guide Soloing 7. When you’re ready, press the [SOLO] key for the channel(s) you wish to solo. The selected [SOLO] keys light up. Note: Solo channels take priority over the sources you select using the Mon Sel parameter. Note: When channels are configured as stereo pairs (“Pairing Channels” on page 68), their [SOLO] keys are linked. Note: If Solo Mode is set to M-SOLO, you must raise the fader for the soloed channel and the Master fader or you will not hear any output. VM200 User’s Guide 103 Monitoring Signals Solo Safe Function The VM200 features a Solo Safe function that enables you to designate specific channels as “solo safe.” You can monitor solo safe channel signals that are sent to the stereo buss regardless of the channel’s [SOLO] key status. This function is available when Solo Mode is set to M-Solo (see page 98). 1. Press the Setup [SYSTEM] key four times (from start of cycle). The VM200 displays the SETUP:SYSTEM 4:SOLO SAFE function page. All [EQ EDIT] keys flash. 2. Select the desired channel layer using the [1–8 ANALOG IN], [9–16 ADAT IN], and [17–20 EFF RTN] Page Select keys and press the [EQ EDIT] key of the target channels. The [EQ EDIT] keys of the solo safe channels light up, the [EQ EDIT] keys of the non-solo safe channels continue to flash. The boxes of the solo safe channels are highlighted (dark) on the display. In the example above, channels 5 & 6 are designated as “solo safe” channels. In this case, pressing the channel 1 [SOLO] key in M-Solo mode will enable you to monitor not only the channel 1 signal, but also the channels 5 & 6 signals from the stereo buss. Other channels will be muted. 3. Press the [EXIT] key or the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. 104 VM200 User’s Guide Metering Signal Levels Metering Signal Levels You can view signal level meters for input Channels 1 through 20 on the CHANNEL EDIT/INPUTS function page. You can display this function page by pressing the [CHANNEL/METER] key. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key again to display the CHANNEL EDIT/OUTPUTS function page. This page includes meters for ADAT Outs, Stereo Buss Out, Rec Buss Out, Aux Sends, and the Effect Sends. You can also monitor input channel levels for individual channels on the corresponding CH VIEW and EQ EDIT function pages. (You can display these pages by pressing the [CH VIEW] key or the corresponding [EQ EDIT] key.) The CH VIEW function page also displays graphic faders and numerical values to indicate the level of the AUX Sends and the Effect sends. See “Viewing Individual Channel, Aux Send, and Effect Send Meters” on page 106 for more information. You can also meter stereo output levels by watching the dedicated L/R or St Buss/Solo LED meters, which are located to the right of the LCD Display. The LED meters feature overload (OL) indicators, which light up when signals clip. If this happens, lower the levels. Otherwise the signal may distort. Viewing Input/Output Level Meters 1. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key (or the [EXIT] key in most modes). The VM200 displays the first CHANNEL EDIT page, which features input level meters. 2. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] button as desired to toggle between the input level meters and output level meters. CHANNEL EDIT/INPUT function page (first press of Channel/Meter key) CHANNEL EDIT/OUTPUT function page (second press of Channel/Meter key) VM200 User’s Guide 105 Monitoring Signals LED Display Meter (L/R or ST BUSS/SOLO) The VM200 features two LED meters to the right of the LCD Display that enable you to view stereo output levels. These nine-segment LED meters display levels for the left and right channels (L/R) or the Stereo Buss and soloing channels (St Buss/Solo). The meters range from –48 dB to OL (overload). The overload indicator lights when the signal clips. If an OL LED lights up while you are metering levels, reduce the stereo output level to prevent signal distortion. Viewing Individual Channel, Aux Send, and Effect Send Meters 1. Press the [CH VIEW] key. The VM200 displays the CH VIEW function page. [CH VIEW] key and all [EQ EDIT] keys flash. 2. Select a target channel layer by using a Page Select key. 3. Press the target channel’s [EQ EDIT] key. The VM200 displays the CH VIEW function page for the corresponding channel. As you move the faders, notice how the fader icons move to indicate the fader positions. CH VIEW function page for Channel 4 channel fader level 106 Aux Send level EFF Send level VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Outputs RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 7 LO About This Chapter IT ON LO ON ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO This chapter describes the output configurations of the VM200, including the stereo buss output, the recording buss output, the ADAT and S/P DIF digital outputs, and the auxiliary (AUX) sends. LO 0 -20 -10 -30 -40 0 0 +1 - -30 0 -30 0 -30 10 - 0 -40 -20 3 -10 - -40 -20 -10 - -40 -20 -10 0 +1 0 +1 0 +1 -40 - -60 -40 - -30 -20 -20 -30 6 14 -20 -30 0 +1 -40 -20 -10 ON ON ON ON 108 108 108 109 109 110 110 110 111 111 111 112 112 112 113 113 115 115 116 116 117 117 118 119 120 121 5 13 -10 0 +1 0 SO LO LO SO LO SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 0 +1 ON EQ LO SO ED EQ CH A ME NNE TE L/ R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 12 20 -10 0 LO SO IT ED PA N ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 -10 EQ Q FR EQ Q PA N EQ ND SE C MM -30 0 +1 ED ON IT PA N ID -M N GA I /LO EQ PA I GR R/ OU P VM200 User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 0 LO SO FR EQ EQ ED ON IT Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST BUSS OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAT OUT & S/P DIF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the ST BUSS OUT Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing the ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the ST BUSS OUT Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting the ST BUSS OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the REC BUSS OUT Meters . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing the REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the REC BUSS OUT Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter) Monitoring AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the AUX Send and Master Setting . . . . . . Sending Channel Signals to AUX Sends . . . . . . . . Pre-fader/Post-fader AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing AUX Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoothing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Buss Routing for Each Channel . . . . . . . . . 11 19 PA N 0 SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ Chapter Contents 107 Outputs Overview The VM200 features several types of outputs, including the stereo buss output, the recording buss output, the ADAT and S/P DIF digital outputs, and auxiliary (AUX) and effect (EFF) sends. You can control much of the signal routing by setting parameters on the ROUTING function page. You can display the ROUTING function page by pressing the [ROUTING/PHASE] key. The Effect Send capabilities of the VM200 are explained in more detail in the “Effects” chapter page 123. ST BUSS OUT The VM200 converts the digital stereo buss (ST BUSS) signal to an analog signal using 20-bit 128-times oversampling D/A converters. It then outputs it from the ST BUSS OUT unbalanced phone jack (located on the rear panel) with a –10 dB nominal output level. To output signals from these connectors, you need to route channel signals to ST BUSS using the ROUTING function page, which you can access by pressing the [ROUTING/PHASE] key. (See “Input Channels” on page 59.) For more information, see “Using the ST BUSS OUT” on page 110. ST BUSS OUT ST BUSS OUT R L REC BUSS OUT The VM200 converts the digital stereo signal output from the REC BUSS to an analog signal using 20-bit 128-times oversampling D/A converters. The analog signal is then output from the rear panel via the REC BUSS OUT unbalanced phone jacks with a –10 dB nominal output level. To output signals from these connectors, you need to route channel signals to REC BUSS using the ROUTING function page accessed via the [ROUTING/PHASE] key. (See “Input Channels” on page 59.) The signals from the REC BUSS are also routed to input channels 1–8. More specifically, the left channel signals are routed to channels 1, 3, 5, and 7, and the right channel signals are routed to channels 2, 4, 6, and 8. You can then route the signals directly to the ADAT OUTS 1–8. In this way, you can output two mixes simultaneously. For more information, see “Using the REC BUSS OUT” on page 112. REC BUSS OUT REC BUSS OUT R 4 L 3 ADD.AUX SEND 108 VM200 UserÕs Guide ADAT OUT & S/P DIF OUT Note: If the ADD. AUX parameter is turned on, the REC BUSS is disabled. Fore more information, see “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115. ADAT OUT & S/P DIF OUT You can output digital stereo signals from the ADAT OUT and S/P DIF OUT connectors. You can connect any ADAT-compatible recording device to the ADAT OUT optical connector, including a Fostex VR800 recorder, Alesis® ADAT, Alesis ADAT-XT, or other digital multitrack recorders. The S/P DIF OUT uses an optical connector. You can use this to route the stereo signal to any S/P DIF format audio device, such as a computer soundcard or DAT recorder. For more information, see “Digital Connections” on page 159. ADAT S/P DIF IN OUT IN OUT ADAT and S/P DIF connections AUX SEND You can assign a signal to AUX Sends 1 through 4. (AUX Sends 3 & 4 are available only when the ADD. AUX parameter is turned on. For more information, see “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115.) The AUX Sends provide additional outputs that you can use for a variety of purposes. For example, you can route a signal out the AUX SENDS to an external DAT recorder, talkback system, or other application. You can configure channel AUX Sends as pre-fader or post-fader sends. For more information, see “Using the AUX Sends” on page 115. REC BUSS OUT AUX SEND AUX Sends 1–4 R 4 L 3 2 1 ADD.AUX SEND VM200 User’s Guide 109 Outputs Using the ST BUSS OUT The VM200 converts the ST BUSS stereo digital signal to analog using 20-bit 128-times oversampling D/A converters. The analog signal is then output from the ST BUSS OUT connectors on the rear panel. These connectors are unbalanced phone jacks with a –10 dB nominal output level. The same ST BUSS stereo digital signal is also converted to an S/P DIF signal via the S/P DIF encoder and output from the S/P DIF OUT connector on the rear panel. (For more information, see “Using S/P DIF OUT” on page 168.) In a typical recording setup, you could use the ST BUSS OUT for master recording. Monitoring the ST BUSS OUT You can monitor the ST BUSS OUT signal by connecting the MONITOR OUT jacks to an amplifier and speakers. Set the Mon Sel (Monitor Select) parameter on the SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/MON function page to “ST-B” (stereo buss) (see page 98). You can also monitor the ST BUSS OUT signal through a pair of stereo headphones connected to the PHONES jack. For more information, see “Monitoring Signals” on page 97. Viewing the ST BUSS OUT Meters You can view the stereo output signal levels on the nine-segment L/R Stereo/Solo LED meters. You can also view the stereo output level on meters that appear on the CHANNEL EDIT/OUTPUTS function page, which you can display by pressing the [CHANNEL/METER] key twice. LED meters ST BUSS OUT level METER OL -3 -6 -9 -12 -18 -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO See the “Monitoring Signals” on page 97 for more information. 110 VM200 UserÕs Guide Soloing the ST BUSS OUT Soloing the ST BUSS OUT You can solo the signal output from the ST BUSS by pressing the [SOLO] key on the Master channel. The Master [SOLO] key lights up. The Master [SOLO] key works only when Solo mode is set to PFL, which is the default setting. If Solo mode is set to M-Solo, the Master [SOLO] key is disabled. For more information on Solo mode, see page 101. If you set the Solo Key parameter to LATCH, pressing the [SOLO] key solos the stereo output until you press the [SOLO] key again. If the parameter is set to UNLATCH, the stereo output will solo only until you release the Master [SOLO] key. Setting the ST BUSS OUT Level You control the stereo output level using the Master fader. SOLO Master SOLO key ON Master ON key 0 Since the Master fader can also control the Aux and Effects Send master levels, depending on the Fader Mode, you need to press the [CHANNEL] key before you can adjust the stereo output level. This places the VM200 in Channel Fader Mode, enabling the Master fader to control the stereo output level. See “Faders” on page 32 for more information. -10 -20 -30 -40 Master Fader -60 - MASTER Muting the ST BUSS OUT You can mute the stereo output by turning off the [ON] key for the Master channel. The [ON] key lights up when stereo output is on. Turning off the [ON] key mutes the stereo buss output. Since the Master [ON] key can also mute the Aux and Effects Send master outputs, depending on the Fader Mode, you may need to press the [CHANNEL] key to place the VM200 in Channel Fader Mode before you can mute the stereo buss output. This places the VM200 in Channel Fader Mode, enabling the Master [ON] key to mute the stereo output. See “[ON] Keys” on page 34 for more information. VM200 User’s Guide 111 Outputs Using the REC BUSS OUT The VM200 converts the REC BUSS stereo signal to analog using 20-bit 128-times oversampling D/A converters. The analog signal is then output from the REC BUSS OUT connectors on the rear panel. These connectors are unbalanced phone jacks with a –10 dB nominal output level. The REC BUSS also sends the left signal to channels 1, 3, 5, and 7, and the right signal to channels 2, 4, 6, and 8 so that you can route them to ADAT OUT 1–8 directly. This configuration enables you to send two mixes to two different external recorders at the same time (assuming one recorder is ADAT-compatible). (For more information on ADAT OUT connections, see “Digital Connections” on page 159.) Note: If the ADD. AUX parameter is on, the REC BUSS is disabled. Fore more information, see “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115. Monitoring the REC BUSS OUT You can monitor the REC BUSS OUT signal by connecting the MONITOR OUT jacks to an amplifier and speakers. Set the Mon Sel (Monitor Select) parameter on the SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/MON page to “REC-B” (see page 98). You can also monitor the REC BUSS OUT signal through a pair of stereo headphones connected to the PHONES jack. For more information, see “Monitoring Signals” on page 97. Viewing the REC BUSS OUT Meters You can view the REC BUSS OUT level on meters that appear on the CHANNEL EDIT/OUTPUTS function page. You can display this function page by pressing the [CHANNEL/METER] key twice. See the “Monitoring” chapter on page 97 for more information. REC BUSS OUT meter 112 VM200 UserÕs Guide Soloing the REC BUSS OUT Soloing the REC BUSS OUT You can solo the signal output from the REC BUSS by pressing the REC BUSS [SOLO] key (located next to the Master [SOLO] key). The Rec Buss [SOLO] key lights up. The Rec Buss [SOLO] key works only when Solo mode is set to PFL, which is the default setting. If Solo mode is set to M-Solo, the Rec Buss [SOLO] key is disabled. For more information on Solo mode, see page 101. If you set the Solo Key parameter to LATCH, pressing the Rec Buss [SOLO] key solos the stereo output until you press the Rec Buss [SOLO] key again. If the parameter is set to UNLATCH, the Rec Buss output will solo only until you release the Rec Buss [SOLO] key. REC BUSS SOLO REC BUSS SOLO key Setting the REC BUSS OUT Level You can set the Rec Buss output level on the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. 1. 2. VM200 User’s Guide Press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key. The VM200 displays the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. Rotate the EQ/HI Gain rotary control (channels 7/8) to adjust the REC-B GAIN parameter. The REC-B GAIN parameter controls the Rec Buss Out level. 113 Outputs You can adjust the level (-∞, -90 to 0dB) in 128 increments. The default setting is 0dB. EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN Note: If you try to operate the Gain rotary control while the ADD.AUX parameter is turned ON, the VM200 displays a warning message and you will be unable to adjust the REC-B Gain. Use the EQ/LO-MID Gain rotary control (channels 3/4) to turn off the ADD.AUX parameter on the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. 114 VM200 UserÕs Guide Using the AUX Sends Using the AUX Sends The VM200 features four auxiliary (AUX) sends, which enable you to send a signals to various destinations. You can send signals from input channels 1 through 20 to AUX Sends 1 through 4. You can use the four AUX Sends individually or in stereo pairs. REC BUSS OUT AUX SEND AUX Sends 1–4 R 4 L 3 2 1 ADD.AUX SEND You can configure each channel AUX Send as a pre-fader or post-fader send. AUX Sends 1 through 4 signals are routed to the AUX SEND 1 through 4 jacks respectively. (AUX 3 & 4 are available only if you turn on the ADD.AUX parameter, as described below.) The VM200 also features a Smoothing function that reduces CPU load to achieve smoother fader adjustment. The VM200 does not include dedicated AUX return inputs. Use the insert channels to return AUX signals. For more information, see “Insert Channels 1–4” on page 62. Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter) If you wish to use AUX Sends 3 & 4, you must turn on the ADD. AUX parameter on the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. 1. Press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key. The VM200 displays the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. ADD.AUX parameter 2. 3. 4. Rotate the EQ/LO-MID Gain control to turn on the ADD.AUX parameter. The ON indicator in the ADD. AUX parameter field flashes. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the change. Press the [EXIT] key to display the CHANNEL EDIT function page. Note: When the ADD.AUX parameter is turned on, the REC BUSS OUT jacks function as AUX Sends 3 and 4, and the REC BUSS OUT routing is disabled. VM200 User’s Guide 115 Outputs Monitoring AUX Sends You can monitor the REC BUSS OUT signal by connecting the MONITOR OUT jacks to an amplifier and speakers. Set the Mon Sel (Monitor Select) parameter on the 1:CLOCK/MON page to AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, or AUX4 (see page 98). You can also monitor the REC BUSS OUT signal through a pair of stereo headphones connected to the PHONES jack. For more information, see “Monitoring Signals” on page 97. Viewing the AUX Send and Master Setting You can view the AUX Send level and send master level on meters that appear on the CH VIEW function page and the Channel Edit/Outputs function page respectively. To view the AUX Send level, press the [CH VIEW] key to display the 1:CH VIEW function page, press a Page Select key to select the desired channel layer, and press the [EQ EDIT] key for the Aux Send channel. You can display the CHANNEL EDIT/OUTPUTS function page to view the AUX Send master level by pressing the [CHANNEL/METER] key twice. See “Monitoring Signals” on page 97 for more information. 116 VM200 UserÕs Guide Sending Channel Signals to AUX Sends Sending Channel Signals to AUX Sends You can send signals from input channels 1 through 20 to AUX Sends 1 through 4. If the AUX Send is configured post-fader (see “Pre-fader/Post-fader AUX Sends” below), first raise the channel’s regular fader l prior to step 1 by pressing the [CHANNEL] button, and then raising the fader. 1. In the Fader Mode section, press the [AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], or [AUX4] key to select an AUX Send. The faders now function as channel AUX Send controls for the selected AUX Send. Note: If the ADD. AUX parameter is on, the REC BUSS is disabled. Fore more information, see “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115. 2. 3. Raise the fader of the channel you want to send to the AUX Send. Use the Master fader to adjust the AUX Sends master level. When channels are configured as stereo pairs their AUX Send controls are linked. (See “Pairing Channels” on page 68). Note: If the Smoothing function is set to Level 2 (default), AUX1 and EFF1 are linked, and AUX2 and EFF2 are linked. Therefore, setting the AUX1 level also sets EFF1 to the same level; similarly, setting the AUX2 level sets EFF2 to the same level. If the Smoothing function is set to Level 1, you may hear a slight stepping noise when you move the fader. For more information on the Smoothing function, see “Smoothing Function” on page 120. Pre-fader/Post-fader AUX Sends You can configure each AUX Send as pre-fader or post-fader by adjusting parameters on the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. Pre-fader signals do not pass through the channel faders and are therefore unaffected by channel fader settings. Post-fader signals pass through the channel faders and are affected by channel fader settings. Follow these steps to configure each AUX Send as pre-fader or post-fader. 1. Press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key. The VM200 displays the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. pre-fader/post-fader AUX Sends VM200 User’s Guide 117 Outputs 2. 3. Use the Freq and Q rotary controls for channels 1–4 to select PRE or POST for AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, and AUX4. The default setting is POST. When you change the setting, the selected value flashes. Press the [EXIT] key to display the CHANNEL EDIT function page. Muting AUX Sends You can mute the AUX Send Masters by turning off the [ON] key for the Master channel. Since the Master [ON] key can also mute the Stereo Buss and Effects Send master outputs, depending on the Fader Mode, you need to press the [AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], or [AUX4] key to select an AUX Send before you can mute it. 1. 2. Press the [AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], or [AUX4] key to select an AUX Send. The selected AUX key flashes. Use the MASTER [ON] button to turn the AUX Send on and off. When AUX Sends are configured as stereo pairs, their [ON] buttons are linked (see “Pairing Channels” on page 68). See “[ON] Keys” on page 34 for more information. SOLO ON Master ON key 118 VM200 UserÕs Guide Pairing AUX Sends Pairing AUX Sends You can pair AUX Sends 1 and 2 and AUX Sends 3 and 4 for stereo signal processing. When paired, the Master Faders, [ON] keys, and monitors of each AUX Send are set the same and linked for simultaneous control. Follow these steps to pair AUX Sends: 1. Press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key. The VM200 displays the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. AUX PAIR parameters 2. 3. Use the Freq and Q rotary controls for channels 7/8 to turn the A1&A2 and A3&4 parameters On or Off. The default setting is “off.” If you change the parameter setting, the indicator flashes. Press the [EXIT] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Note: If the ADD. AUX parameter is on, the REC BUSS is disabled. For more information, see “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115. Note: When AUX1 and 2 are paired, the AUX1 signal is sent to the left channel and AUX2 signal is sent to the right. Similarly, when AUX3 and 4 are paired, the AUX3 signal is sent to the left channel and the AUX4 signal is sent to the right channel. Note: If the Smoothing function is set to Level 2 (default), the AUX pair setting will affect the EFF pair setting. For more information on the Smoothing function, see “Smoothing Function” on page 120. VM200 UserÕs Guide 119 Outputs Smoothing Function Depending on the sound you are mixing, you may hear a slight stepping noise when you slide the faders. This indicates an overloaded CPU. To resolve this problem, the VM200 features a Smoothing function that reduces CPU load to achieve smoother fader adjustment. When the Smoothing function is set to Level 2, AUX1 and EFF1 are linked and AUX2 and EFF2 are linked. Therefore, the level settings, pair settings, and pan settings for AUX Send 1 and AUX Send 2 will be applied to the level settings, pair settings, and pan settings for EFF1 and EFF2. However, fader operation will be much finer. Follow the steps below to set the Smoothing function. The default setting is Smoothing “LEVEL 2.” 1. Press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key. The VM200 displays the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. Smoothing parameter 2. Use the EQ/HI-MID Gain rotary control to toggle between Level1 and Level2. Level 1: AUX Sends 1/2 and EFF Sends 1/2 are not linked, but the faders’ smoothing function may be coarse, and depending on the sound, you may hear a slight stepping noise when you slide the faders in AUX Send mode. Level 2: AUX Send 1 and EFF Send 1 are linked, and AUX Send 2 and EFF Send 2 are linked. The level settings, pair setting, and pan setting for AUX Send 1 and AUX Send 2 will be applied to the level settings, pair settings, and pan settings for EFF1 and EFF2. However, fader operation will be much smoother and you should not hear any noise. Note: If the EQ Enable parameter in the CURRENT SCENE STATUS page is set to “1–16,” the Smoothing function remains Level 2 even if you can change to Level 1 on the display. 3. 120 Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the setting. VM200 UserÕs Guide Viewing Buss Routing for Each Channel Viewing Buss Routing for Each Channel The CH VIEW function page includes a ROUT display that indicates whether the specified channel is routed to the ADAT Direct Outs, the Stereo Buss, or the Record Buss. 1. 2. Press the [CH VIEW] key. Press the [EQ EDIT] key for the desired channel. The VM200 displays the 1:CH VIEW function page, which includes the ROUT indicator in the top center of the display. The D, R, and S indicators represent the ADAT Direct Outs, the Record Buss, and the Stereo Buss. A highlighted (dark) indicator means the channel is being sent to the specified buss. ROUT D, R, S indicator VM200 User’s Guide 121 Outputs 122 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Effects RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 8 LO About This Chapter -20 EF IT ON EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO This chapter describes how to apply the VM200 internal effects to the signals, and how to recall, store, and edit the programs in the Effects library. LO ON LO -10 -20 -30 0 +1 -30 0 0 +1 -40 -20 -10 ON 0 +1 -30 -40 0 -20 -10 - ON 11 19 -40 0 +1 -30 0 -20 3 -10 - -40 0 +1 -30 0 -20 -10 - -40 0 +1 -30 0 -20 -10 - ON ON -40 - -60 -40 - -20 -30 6 14 -10 0 SO LO LO SO LO SO 124 125 125 128 128 128 129 129 130 130 130 131 132 132 132 132 132 133 133 134 135 137 139 5 13 0 +1 ON EQ LO SO ED EQ CH A ME NNE TE L/ R -30 0 LO SO IT ED PA N ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED - -10 EQ Q FR EQ Q PA N EQ ND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - MM C SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 12 20 0 +1 ED ON IT PA N ID -M N GA I /LO EQ PA I GR R/ OU P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 0 LO VM200 Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect Preset Library List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Effects Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Effects Return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Signal to Effects Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Sends Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-fader/Post-fader Effect Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Level . . . . . . Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Master Level Muting Effect Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Effects Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Return Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Effect Return Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Effects Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Effects Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Effect Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO FR EQ EQ -20 ED ON IT PA N PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA Chapter Contents 0 SO Q IN /H I-M ID EQ ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ This chapter also includes a complete effects parameter list. VM200 User’s Guide 123 Effects VM200 Effects The VM200 features two on-board stereo multi-effects processors (EFF1, EFF2) that provide a wide range of high-quality effects, including reverbs, delays, choruses, flangers, and more. These internal effect processors use A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology, developed exclusively by Fostex). This technology extracts maximum efficiency from limited DSP power. It achieves an overwhelmingly high-density Early Reflection sound and a smooth High Dump response through the application of H.F.A. (Harmonic Feedback Algorithm). Furthermore, it carries out an elaborate reverb simulation to create clear sounds through H.D.L.P. (Hi-Density Logarithmic Processing), which eliminates the mutual interference between the numerous integrated delay modules and reduces sonic impurities and “grit.” The VM200 includes an Effects Library that contains 50 Preset programs and 50 User programs. See the “Effects Library” on page 125 for more information. You can recall and edit any Preset or User program to create a new effect, then store it in any User program location. You can load different effect programs to processors EFF1 and EFF2 and route signals through either as desired. To recall an effect, press the EFF1 or EFF2 to specify the processor you wish to use. Then press the Recall key and select the effect from the library. (See “Recalling Effects Programs” on page 134.) To edit an effect, press the EFF1 or EFF2 key to display the EFF1 or EFF2 function pages, which include the name and number of the selected effect and a set of parameters associated with the effect. You can adjust the parameters using the rotary controls (Gain, Freq, Q). (See “Editing Effects” on page 133.) Effect busses 1 and 2 feed effects processors 1 and 2 respectively. Processed signals return to channels 17–20. You may apply effects to input channels 1–20. You can also store effects selection in Scene Memory. 124 VM200 User’s Guide Effects Library Effects Library The VM200 also includes an Effects Library that contains 50 Preset programs and 50 User programs. Effect Preset Library List The following table lists the Preset effect programs. See “Effects Parameters” on page 139 for detailed parameter information. Reverb effects # Name Display Description 00 Normal Large Hall NomL.Hall Conventional large hall, with sonic detail, clarity, and an appropriate amount of early reflections. 01 Lo-Freq Large Hall LowL.Hall Large hall with lingering low-frequency reverb components. 02 Presence Large Hall PrsL.HALL Reverb with crispness and good presence. 03 Wet Large Hall WetL.HALL Reverb with restrained high-frequency range and gentle character. 04 Stadium STADIUM Stadium reverb with many long early reflections. NomS.Hall Conventional small hall, with sonic detail, clarity, and an appropriate amount of early reflections. Normal Small 05 Hall 06 Lo-Freq Small Hall LowS.HALL Small hall with lingering low-frequency reverb components. 07 Presence Small Hall PrsS.HALL General-purpose small hall with crisp sound and few early reflections. 08 Wet Small Hall WetS.HALL Small hall with little high-frequency range and calming effects. 09 No-E/R Hall NoER.HALL Small hall with no early reflections, and the entire frequency range decays in the same way. 10 Normal Room Nom.ROOM Conventional room reverb simulating a nice space with just enough “sparkle.” 11 Garage GARAGE Room reverb with crisp presence simulating a small, live space such as a garage. 12 Dead Room Dead.ROOM Room reverb simulating a small, dead room. Add just a bit of this to give warmth to a sound. Ideal for narrations. 13 Presence Room Prs.ROOM All-purpose room reverb with few early reflections and good definition. 14 Drum_Booth Dr.BOOTH Room reverb simulating a drum booth. 15 Normal Plate Nom.PLATE Contemporary-feeling plate reverb with a wide bandwidth. 16 Old Plate Old.PLATE Conventional plate reverb with the character of classic plate devices. 17 Presence Plate Prs.PLATE Crisp plate reverb with extended highs. 18 Wet Plate Wet.PLATE Plate reverb with a gentle character. DigiPLATE Plate reverb emphasizing a digital feel, with metallic-sounding early reflection. 19 Digital Plate VM200 User’s Guide 125 Effects # Display Description PVo.BOOTH The early reflections of an ideal vocal booth plus short reverberation with extended high range. This adds sparkle to the sound, and is effective when you want to make the vocal stand out in the ensemble. Natural Vocal 21 Booth NVo.BOOTH The early reflections of an ideal vocal booth plus gentle short reverberation. This adds a natural feeling of air, and is effective with simple arrangements with an unhurried vocal. 22 Vocal Reverb Vo.REVERB All-around reverb that makes any vocal sound great. 23 Solo Vocal Solo.VO Spacious short delay plus a reverb with a real plate character. Blends naturally into any background. 24 Arena Vocal Arena VO Spacious stadium-type early reflections plus short reverberation with extended high range. Good for chorus parts. 20 Name Presence Vocal Booth Early Reflection-type Reverbs # Name Display Description 25 Normal Gate Reverb Nom.GATE Standard gate reverb 26 Lo-Freq Mono Kick Gate MnBD.GATE Gate reverb tuned for kick drums, with pan set to the center. 27 Hi-Freq Stereo Snare Gate StSD.GATE Gate reverb tuned for snare drums and percussion 28 Hall E/R Hall.ER Simulation of early reflections in a large hall. 29 Room E/R Room.ER Simulation of early reflections in a room. 30 Spring E/R Spring.ER Simulation of early reflections of a spring reverb. 31 Random E/R Random.ER Random early reflections. 32 Reverse E/R Reverse.ER Reversed early reflections of a hall reverb. Display Description 33 Mono Delay MonoDELAY Mono delay with longer delay time, which can create special effects using HPF and LPF. 34 Pan Delay Pan.DELAY Panning delay that pans sound left to right. 35 Dual Delay DualDELAY Two independent delays. 36 3ch Delay 3ch.DELAY 3-tap delay, which can create interesting effects with your wizardry. Delays # Name Modulation effects # Name Display Description 37 Chorus CHORUS Standard chorus effect setting. 38 3D Chorus 3D.CHORUS More natural and spacious effects than Chorus. FLANGE Standard flanging effect setting. You can pan two types of effects sound to any position. 39 126 Flange VM200 User’s Guide Effect Preset Library List Pitch Changer # Name Display Description 40 Mono PitCh MonoPITCH Standard pitch shifter. 41 Dual PitCh DualPITCH Stereo pitch shift with two channels pitch-shifted independently. Multi-effects VM200 User’s Guide # Name Display Description 42 Mono Delay -Normal Hall MnDL-NmHL Combination of mono delay and hall reverb. 43 Mono Delay -Normal Plate MnDL-NmPL Combination of mono delay and plate reverb. 44 Panning Delay -Normal Hall PnDL-NmHL Combination of pan delay and hall reverb. 45 Panning Delay -Normal Plate PnDL-NmPL Combination of pan delay and plate reverb. 46 CHORUSREVERB CHORS-REV An effect which adds reverb to chorus. 47 REVERBCHORUS REV-CHORS An effect which adds chorus to reverb. 48 FLANGEREVERB FLG-REV An effect which adds reverb to flange. 49 REVERB -FLANGE REV-FLG An effect which adds flange to reverb. 127 Effects Applying Effects To apply an effect, you must do two things: ❑ route the signal to one of two effects processors, and ❑ return the processed signal back to the mix. The following sections explain these tasks. Note: When EQ Enable parameter is set to “EQ1–16,” both effects processors are disabled. For more information, see “EQ Enabling Channels” on page 80. Selecting an Effects Processor 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. Check the input channel, turn on the [ON] key, and raise the fader for the channel. Press the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key in the Eff Edit section to select an effects processor. The selected key lights up and the VM200 displays the EFF EDIT function page, which includes parameters for the current effect. Recall the desired effects program from the Effects Library. (For more information on how to recall the effects program, see “Recalling Effects Programs” on page 134.) Setting Effects Return Before you send a signal to an effects processor, you must set up a routing path to return it to the mix so it can be monitored and output. Follow the steps below: 5. 128 Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key, then the [17–20 EFF RTN] key. The [17–20 EFF RTN] key lights up. VM200 User’s Guide Sending Signal to Effects Processor 6. 7. Lower then raise the faders that correspond to the effect you are using for return signals. Make sure the corresponding channel [ON] key is turned on. (Channels 17 & 18 faders control the EFF1 processor; channels 19 & 20 faders control EFF2.) You must lower then raise the fader to set the initial return level. (See “Faders” on page 32 for more information.) Adjust the PAN control for the effects return channel if you desire. Sending Signal to Effects Processor Press the [1–8 ANALOG IN] Page Select key. The [17–20 EFF RTN] key LED turns off and the [1–8 ANALOG IN] Page Select key lights up. 9. Press the [EFF1] key in the Fader Mode section. (If you are using the EFF2 processor, press the [EFF2] key.) The [EFF1] key flashes orange and the [AUX1] key flashes red in the Fader Mode section. 10. Lower then raise the fader for the channel you wish to route to the effects processor. Then lower and raise the Master fader to set the desired effects send signal level. This sends the channel signal to the selected effects processor. The effects send meter in the CH VIEW function page displays the level of the effects send signal, indicating that signals are being fed to the selected effects processor. As you raise the faders, you should hear more of the effect sound. If input channels are paired, their effect send controls will be linked. You can edit and store effects settings. Refer to “Storing Effects Programs” on page 135 for more information. 8. Note: If you set the Smoothing function to Level 2 (default), AUX1 and EFF1 are linked, and AUX2 and EFF2 are linked. Therefore, setting the EFF1 level will set AUX1 to the same level. Similarly, setting the EFF2 level sets AUX2 to the same level. If the Smoothing function is set to Level 1, you may hear a slight stepping noise when you move the fader. For more information, see “Smoothing Function” on page 120. Routing Effects Returns Once you’ve routed a signal to an effects processor and returned it to the mix as described in the preceding sections, you can route it to several destinations. You can route Effects returns to the stereo buss (ST BUSS) or the recording buss (REC BUSS). See “Routing Input Channels” on page 66 for more information. You can also route signals to AUX Sends 1 through 4. (Note that the REC BUSS OUT is disabled if AUX Sends 3 and 4 are selected). VM200 User’s Guide 129 Effects Controlling the Sends Signals Pre-fader/Post-fader Effect Sends You can configure each Effect Send on input channels 1 through 20 as “pre-fader” or “post-fader” by adjusting parameters on the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page. Pre-fader signals do not pass through the channel faders and are therefore unaffected by channel fader settings. Post-fader signals pass through the channel faders and are affected by channel fader settings. The channel faders enable you to adjust the channel level and the Effect Send level of post-fader signals simultaneously. Follow the steps below to select “pre-fader” or “post-fader” for an effect processor. 1. Press the [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key. The VM200 displays the CURRENT SCENE STATUS function page: 2. Rotate the Freq and Q rotary controls for channels 5–6 to select PRE or POST for the EFF1 and EFF2 parameters. The default setting is “POST.” When you change the setting, the selected value flashes. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selection. Press the [EXIT] key to display the CHANNEL EDIT function page. 3. 4. Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Level The VM200 enables you to view and adjust effect send levels for effects processors EFF1 and EFF2 on the Channel View (CH VIEW) function page. A graphic image of a fader and a numerical value represent the send levels on the display. To view and adjust the effect send levels, follow these steps: 1. 130 Press the [CH VIEW] key. The [CH VIEW] key and all [EQ EDIT] keys flash. VM200 User’s Guide Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Master Level The VM200 displays the 1:CH VIEW function page, which includes graphic and numeric indicators of the effect send levels for EFF1 and EFF2. channel number effect send fader level 2. 3. 4. If you wish to adjust the effect send level, specify a channel whose fader you wish to use by pressing a Page Select key and the [EQ EDIT] key for the channel. The VM200 displays a new channel number in the CH section, near the upper-left corner of the display. Press the EFF1 or EFF2 key in the Fader Mode section to specify an effects processor. The selected key flashes. Raise the fader for the corresponding channel. The graphic fader and numerical read-out on the display reflect the adjustment in real-time. Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Master Level You can control Effect Send master levels using the Master fader in the appropriate Fader Mode. 1. 2. Press the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key in the Fader Mode section to specify the effects processor you wish to adjust. The selected key flashes. Raise or lower the Master fader to adjust the Effect Send master level. The Effect Sends master level is displayed on the output channel page of the CHANNEL EDIT function page (also called the “CHANNEL EDIT/OUTPUT” function page). effect send master level VM200 User’s Guide 131 Effects Muting Effect Sends You can mute Effect Send masters using the Master [ON] key. The function of this key depends on the selected Fader mode. See “[ON] Keys” on page 34 for more information. 1. 2. Press the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key in the Fader Mode section to select Effect Send 1 or 2. Press the Master [ON] key to turn the Effect Send on or off. Monitoring Effects Sends You can monitor the EFF send signal by connecting the MONITOR OUT jacks to an amplifier and speakers. Set the Mon Sel (Monitor Select) parameter on the SETUP:SYSTEM 1: CLOCK/MON function page to EFF1 or EFF2. You can also monitor the EFF send signal through a pair of stereo headphones connected to the PHONES jack. For more information, see “Monitoring Signals” on page 97. Controlling the Return Signals This section explains how to set levels and pan effect return. Setting the Effect Return Level You can use the channels 17–20 faders to adjust the Effect return level. 1. 2. 3. Press the [CHANNEL] key in the Fader Mode section. Press the [17–20 EFF RTN] Page Select key. Raise the channel fader to adjust the level. You can view the effect return level on the CHANNEL EDIT/INPUT function page. effect return level Panning Effects Returns The Channels 17–20 panpots pan signals between the left and right channels of the Stereo Buss Out and Rec Buss Out, and the odd and even AUX buss outs. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 65 for more information. 132 VM200 UserÕs Guide Effects Library Effects Library The VM200 stores effects settings as programs in the Effects Library, which contains 50 Preset programs (0–49) and 50 User programs (50–99). The Preset effects programs are designed for specific applications and instruments, and include numerous reverbs, delays, choruses, flangers, and combinations. See “Effect Preset Library List” on page 125 for a table of Preset effects programs. You can customize the Preset programs, assign each one a name, and store them as User programs. You can load effects from the Effects Library to either effects processor (EFF1 or EFF2). Editing Effects You can edit effects programs and then store them as user programs in program numbers 50–99. 1. 2. 3. 4. VM200 User’s Guide Recall the effect you wish to edit to the EFF1 or EFF2 processor. See “Recalling Effects Programs” on page 134 for more information on recalling effects. Press the corresponding [EFF1] or [EFF2] key in the Eff Edit section. (If you recalled the effect to EFF1 in step 1, press the [EFF1] key in this step, etc.) The VM200 displays the EFF EDIT function page for the selected effect, and the selected key lights up. Use the Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls to adjust the value of each parameter. If you wish to store the change, refer to “Storing Effects Programs” on page 135. Press the [EXIT] key to return to Channel Edit mode. All parameters are described in detail in “Effects Parameters” on page 139. 133 Effects Recalling Effects Programs You can recall Effects programs 0 through 99. 1. 2. Press the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key in the Eff Edit section to specify the effects processor to which you want to recall the effect. The VM200 displays the function page for the effect currently loaded to the effects processor. The [EFF1] or [EFF2] key you selected lights up. Press the [RECALL] key in the Eff Library section. The VM200 displays the EFF LIBRARY RECALL function page, and the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key flashes. scroll list 3. 4. 5. Use the Data Wheel or the [] keys to select the desired effect program number from the program listing on the function page. Press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 recalls the effect program to the specified effects processor and displays the selected effect’s parameter function page. You can press the [EXIT] key to return to Channel Edit mode at any time. Note: If an effect program in the library contains no data, the term “NO_DATA” will appear on the display. You cannot recall such programs until you store effect data in the program. 134 VM200 User’s Guide Storing Effects Programs Storing Effects Programs You can store effect settings in User programs 50 through 99. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key in the Eff Edit section to specify the effects processor to which you want to store the effect. The VM200 displays the function page for the effect currently loaded to the effects processor, and the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key you selected lights up. You can modify any Preset program or previously-stored User program. Make any adjustments you like, then continue with this procedure to store the “new” effect. Press the [STORE] key in the Eff Library section. The VM200 displays the EFF LIBRARY STORE function page, and the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key flashes. Rotate the Data Wheel or the [] keys to select an Effect program location. The effect program numbers and names scroll in the upper-right of the display. You can select program numbers 50 to 99, inclusive. Effect programs that contain no data are labeled “(No Data)”. Press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 displays the EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page, which enables you to name or re-name effect programs. The program title appears in the upper-right of the display. character-selector character set box title box cursor The EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page includes a character set box that displays all the letters of the alphabet, as well as numerals and punctuation symbols. You can use these characters to name or title your effect program. You can use any triangle of Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls to select the characters for the title. VM200 User’s Guide 135 Effects 5. 6. The Gain control moves the cursor position left and right in the title box. The Freq control moves the character-selector up and down the matrix; the Q control moves the character-selector left and right. You can also press the [] keys to move the cursor and rotate the Data Wheel to select characters or numbers. Rotate the Freq and Q rotary controls to select a character, then turn the Gain rotary control one notch right to move the cursor to the next space in the name, and repeat the process. The very useful “Space to End” option in the lower-right corner of the character set box will fill-in the remainder of your title with blank spaces. When you’ve finished naming the program, press the [ENTER] key to store the Effect program. The following warning dialog appears for a brief moment. Warning: Do not power off the VM200 while it is writing to the flash memory or you may damage the VM200. 7. 136 After the warning, the VM200 displays the EFF EDIT function page. Press the [EXIT] key any time to exit the EFF LIBRARY STORE or EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT function pages. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. VM200 User’s Guide Editing Effect Program Titles Editing Effect Program Titles You can edit Effect program titles, just in case you want to change their name for some reason. To do so, you recall the target Effect program to a channel, then re-store it with a different title. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. VM200 User’s Guide Press the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key in the Eff Edit section to specify the effects processor to which you want to recall the effect. The VM200 displays the function page for the effect currently loaded to the effects processor, and the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key you selected lights up. Press the [RECALL] key in the Eff Library section. The VM200 displays the EFF LIBRARY RECALL function page, and the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key flashes. Rotate the Data Wheel or use the [] keys to select an Effect program you wish to rename. You cannot change the title of Preset programs 00–49. Press the [ENTER] key to recall the desired Effect program. The VM200 recalls the effect program to the specified effects processor and displays the selected effect’s parameter function page. Press the [STORE] key in the Eff Library section. The VM200 displays the EFF LIBRARY STORE function page, and the [EFF1] or [EFF2] key flashes. 137 Effects 6. Press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 displays the EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT function page. The title box shows the program number and the current name. character-selector character set box title box cursor 7. Use any Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls to re-assign a name to the Effect program. You can also press the [] keys to move the cursor and rotate the Data Wheel to select characters or numbers. Refer to step 4 of “Storing Effects Programs” on page 135 for information on assigning a name. When you’ve finished re-naming the program, press the [ENTER] key to store the new Effect program title. The following warning dialog appears for a brief moment. Warning: Do not power off the VM200 while it is writing to the flash memory or you may damage the VM200. 8. 138 After the warning, the VM200 displays the EFF EDIT function page. Press the [EXIT] key any time to exit the EFF LIBRARY STORE or EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT function pages. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. VM200 User’s Guide Effects Parameters Effects Parameters The following tables list the parameters of each effect type. The numbers in parentheses indicate the preset effects that belong to the effect types. Reverb-type Effects (00–24) Parameter REV TIME Value Description 0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step) Length of the reverberation. PRE DLY 0–160 [ms] (1 step) Delay time from the early reflections until the reverb. DENSITY 0–10, AUTO 1 Density of the reverb. E/R BAL 0–100 [%] (1 step) Volume balance between the early reflections and the reverb. Only ER with 0%, and only reverb with 100%. ROOM SIZE 0.1–2.0 (0.1 step) The size of the room (relative to E/R). E/R FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Degree of repeated early reflections DIFFUSION 0–10 (1 step) Left/right spread of the reverb effects. LO RATIO 0.1–2.0 (0.1 step) Length of the low frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to the REV.TIME. HI RATIO 0.1–2.0 (0.1 step) Length of the high frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME. LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)2 Brightness in the high range of the reverb. 1. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used. 2. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. Early Reflection-type Effects (25–32) Parameter VM200 User’s Guide Value Description ROOM SIZE 0.1–2.0 (0.1 step) The size of the room (relative to E/R). INI.DLY 0–200 [ms] (1 step) TBD Delay time from the dry sound until the early reflections of the reverb are heard. LIVENESS 0–10 (1 step)1 Adjusts how the reflections decay. E/R FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Degree of repeated early reflections LO RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Low frequency amount of the feedback. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Low frequency amount of the feedback. DIFFUSION 0–10 (1 step) Left/right spread of the reflections. 139 Effects Parameter Value Description DENSITY 0–10 (1 step) Density of the reverb. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)2 Brightness in the high range of the reverb. LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. 1. 0: dead, 10: live 2. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. MONO_DELAY (33) Parameter Value Description time. 1 DELAY TIME 0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay TEMPO 30–250 [bps] (1 step) Tempo value used to calculate DELAY TIME and NOTE.2 Note value used to calculate DELAY TIME.3 NOTE DELAY FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Amount of delay feedback. LO RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Low frequency amount of the feedback. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) High frequency amount of the feedback. HPF THRU, Same as EQ value [Hz] Cut-off frequency of the high pass filter. LPF Same as EQ value [Hz], THRU Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. 1. If you adjust DELAY TIME, NOTE will be automatically changed. 2. If you adjust TEMPO, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed. 3. If you adjust NOTE, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed. PAN_DELAY (34) Parameter Value DELAY TIME 0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay time. 1 TEMPO 30–250 [bps] (1 step) Tempo value used to calculate DELAY TIME and NOTE.2 Note value used to calculate DELAY TIME.3 NOTE 140 Description DELAY FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Amount of delay feedback. LO RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Low frequency amount of the feedback. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) High frequency amount of the feedback. VM200 User’s Guide Effects Parameters Parameter Value Description HPF THRU, Same as EQ value [Hz] PAN1 L10.0–0.0–R100 (0.5 step) Pan position of the first delay. PAN2 L10.0–0.0–R100 (0.5 step) Pan position of the second delay. LPF Same as EQ value [Hz], THRU Cut-off frequency of the high pass filter. Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. 1. If you adjust DELAY TIME, NOTE will be automatically changed. 2. If you adjust TEMPO, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed. 3. If you adjust NOTE, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed. DUAL_DELAY (35) Parameter Value Description DLY TIME1/2 0.0–680.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay time of DELAY 1 or 2.1 TEMPO 30–250 [bps] (1 step) Tempo value used to calculate DLY TIME1, DLY TIME2, NOTE1, and NOTE2. 2 Note value used to calculate DLY TIME1 or 2.3 DLY1/2NOTE DLY FB1/2 0–100 [%] (1 step) Amount of DELAY1 or 2 feedback. DLY1/2HI-R. 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) High frequency amount of the DELAY 1 or 2 feedback. DLY1/2PAN L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5 step) Pan position of the DELAY 1 or 2. 1. If you change DELAY TIME, NOTE will be automatically changed. 2. If you change TEMPO, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed. Two TEMPO parameter rotary controls operate in sync. 3. If you change DELAY TIME or TEMPO, the closest note value will be selected. 3CH_DELAY (36) Parameter VM200 User’s Guide Value Description DLY TIME 1/2/3 0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay time. (0.1 step when ENTER is pressed.) DLY1/2/3 GAIN 0–100 [%] (1 step) Delay 1/2/3 level. DLY1/2/3 PAN L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5 step) Delay 1/2/3 pan position. FB DLY TIME 0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay time of feedback DELAY FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Amount of delay feedback. 141 Effects Parameter HI RATIO Value 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Description High frequency amount of the feedback. CHORUS (37) Parameter DEPTH Value 0–100 [%] (1 step) step)1 PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Description Modulation depth Brightness in the high range of the reverb. Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. 1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. 3D_CHORUS (38) Parameter DEPTH Value 0–100 [%] (1 step) step)1 PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Description Modulation depth. Brightness in the high range of the reverb. Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. 1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. FLANGE (39) Parameter 142 Value Description RATE 0.01–2.00 [Hz] (0.01 step) Modulation speed. DEPTH 0–100 [%] (1 step) Modulation depth. MOD DLY 0.0–30.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay time from the direct sound until the modulated sound. FLANGE FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Feedback amount. FLA1/2GAIN 0–100 [%] (1 step) Gain of FLANGE 1 or 2. FLA1/2PAN L10.00–0.0–R10.0 (0.5 step) Pan position of FLANGE 1 or 2. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)1 Brightness in the high range of the reverberation. VM200 User’s Guide Effects Parameters Parameter LPF Value 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Description Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. 1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. MONO_PITCH (40) Parameter Value Description PITCH -24–0–+24 (1 step) (+/-2 octave) Amount of pitch shift. ADJUST -100–0–+100 (1 step) (+/- semitone) Fine adjustment to the pitch shift. PITCH DLY 0–340 [ms] (1 step) Delay time of the pitch shift. PITCH FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Feedback amount. PITCH PAN L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5 step) Pan position of the pitch shift. PITCH MODE 1, 2, 3, 4 1 Selects the size of the buffer for pitch shift. 1. Select “1” when response speed is priority. Select “2” for a typical setting. Select “3” or “4” for more clarity. DUAL_PITCH (41) Parameter Value Description PITCH1/2 -24–0–+24 (1 step) (+/-2 octave) Amount of pitch shift for PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2. ADJUST1/2 -100–0–+100 (1 step) (+/- semitone) Fine adjustment to the pitch shift for PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2. PIT1/2 DLY 0–340 [ms] (1 step) Delay time of the pitch shift for PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2. PIT1/2 FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Feedback amount for PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2. PIT1/2 PAN L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5 step) Pan position of PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2. PIT1/2 MODE 1, 2, 3, 4 1 Selects the size of the buffer for PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2. 1. Select “1” when response speed is priority. Select “2” for a typical setting. Select “3” or “4” for more clarity. VM200 User’s Guide 143 Effects Delay->Reverb-type Effects (42–45) Parameter Value Description DELAY TIME 1–500 [ms] (1 step) Delay time. DELAY FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Amount of delay feedback. DELAY BAL 0–100 [%] (1 step) Delay sound level. REV TIME 0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step) Length of the reverberation. PRE DLY 0–160 [ms] (1 step) Delay time from the early reflections until the reverb. DENSITY 0–10, AUTO 1 Density of the reverb. DIFFUSION 0–100 [%] (1 step) Left/right spread of the reverb effects. LO RATIO 0.1–2.0 (0.1 step) Length of the low frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to the REV.TIME. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Length of the high frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME. LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)2 Brightness in the high range of the reverb. 1. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used. 2. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. CHORUS-REVERB (46) Parameter Value Description CHO DEPTH 0–100 [%] (1 step) Modulation depth. REV TIME 0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step) Length of the reverberation. PRE DLY 0–160 [ms] (1 step) Delay time from the early reflections until the reverb. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Length of the high frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)1 Brightness in the high range of the reverb. DENSITY 0–10, AUTO 2 Density of the reverb. LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. REV BAL 0–100 [%] (1 step) Level of reverb sound. 1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. 2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used. 144 VM200 User’s Guide Effects Parameters REVERB-CHORUS (47) Parameter Value Description REV TIME 0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step) Length of the reverberation. PRE DLY 0–160 [ms] (1 step) Delay time from the early reflections until the reverb. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Length of the high frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)1 Brightness in the high range of the reverb. 2 DENSITY 0–10, AUTO LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Density of the reverb. Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. CHO DEPTH 0–100 [%] (1 step) Modulation depth. CHO BAL Level of chorus sound. 0–100 [%] (1 step) 1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. 2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used. FLANGE-REVERB (48) Parameter Value Description FLA RATE 0.01–2.00 [Hz] (00.1 step) Modulation speed. (0.01 step when ENTER is pressed.) DEPTH 0–100 [%] (1 step) Modulation depth. FLA FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Feedback amount. REV TIME 0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step) Length of the reverberation. PRE DLY 0–160 [ms] (1 step) Delay time from the early reflections until the reverb. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Length of the high frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)1 Brightness in the high range of the reverb. 2 DENSITY 0–10, AUTO LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. REV BAL 0–100 [%] (1 step) Level of reverb sound. Density of the reverb. 1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. 2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used. VM200 User’s Guide 145 Effects REVERB-FLANGE (49) Parameter Value Description REV TIME 0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step) Length of the reverberation. PRE DLY 0–160 [ms] (1 step) Delay time from the early reflections until the reverb. HI RATIO 0.1–1.0 (0.1 step) Length of the high frequency reverberation, expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME. PRESENCE -10–0–+10 (1 step)1 Brightness in the high range of the reverb. 2 DENSITY 0–10, AUTO LPF 1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU (step: same as EQ) Cut-off frequency of the low pass filter. FLA RATE 0.01–2.00 [Hz] (0.01 step) Modulation speed. (0.01 step when ENTER is pressed.) FLA FB 0–100 [%] (1 step) Feedback amount. FLA BAL 0–100 [%] (1 step) Level of flange sound. Density of the reverb. 1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting. 2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used. 146 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Scene Memory RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 9 LO About This Chapter IT ON LO ON ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO This chapter describes Scene Memory and explains how to store and recall scenes and how to prevent specific parameters from being updated by a scene recalled from memory. LO -10 -10 -30 0 0 +1 -20 -10 - ON -40 -20 -10 - ON -40 -20 0 +1 -30 0 SO LO - -60 5 13 -40 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - PA I GR R/ OU P 0 +1 -30 0 -20 4 12 20 -10 - -40 -30 ON 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 EQ -10 - ON 0 +1 -30 -40 0 LO SO 6 14 0 +1 ON EQ LO SO ED EQ -30 -20 0 LO SO IT ED PA N ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED -40 -10 EQ Q FR EQ Q PA N -40 0 +1 ED ON IT PA N ID -M N GA I /LO EQ 148 149 149 150 151 151 151 152 153 154 156 156 156 157 - 0 LO SO FR EQ EQ -20 ED ON IT What is Scene Memory? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scene Edit Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Can You Store in a Scene?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Scene Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling Mix Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling a Scene Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling a Scene Automatically at Start-up . . . . . . . . . Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages. Motorized Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Mix Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Scene Memory Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recall Safe Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Recall Safe Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Recall Safe Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 PA N 0 SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ Chapter Contents VM200 User’s Guide 147 Scene Memory What is Scene Memory? “Scene Memory” refers to specific locations in the flash memory of the VM200 in which you can store mix scenes. A mix scene is a snapshot of settings for virtually all VM200 parameters (i.e., EQ, fader positions, effects, and so on) at a given point in time. Say you have finally arrived at the perfect mix setting for recording a particular instrumentalist in your studio. It sounds great, but next week you want to be able to recall the same settings. Simply store the scene into the Scene Memory, and recall it next week. This is one of the principle advantages of a digital recording mixer. The VM200 features 100 (0–99) scene memories. You can assign a name to each one. The VM200 also features three preset scenes: P0 [Init Mix], P1 [Recording], and P2 [Mix Down]. These are useful for common mixing situations. You can set individual channels or parameters as “recall safe.” This means that when you recall a new scene from memory, the settings for the specified channels or parameters remain unchanged. You can store and recall scene memories in three ways: ❑ By pressing the [RECALL] key in the Scene Memory section and selecting a scene; ❑ By programming the VM200 to automatically recall a scene when the VM200 is powered on; ❑ By sending remote MIDI Program Change messages from a computer or MIDI sequencer (see “Program Change To Scene Memory Assignment Tables” on page 210). You can also back up scene memory data to an external MIDI device using MIDI Bulk Dump messages. See “Bulk Dump” on page 189 for more information. You store scenes using the SCENE MEMORY STORE function page, and recall them using the SCENE MEMORY RECALL function page. On both pages, you will utilize the Scene Memory [STORE] and [RECALL] keys. scene number scene name EQ Enable indicator scrollable list of scene names and numbers The SCENE MEMORY STORE function page includes the following information: ❑ current scene name and number (in the above example, “P0” means “Preset 0”) ❑ EQ-enabled channel layers in the current scene ❑ a scrollable list of scene names and numbers 148 VM200 User’s Guide Scene Edit Indicator The bottom half of the function page is identical to the CHANNEL EDIT function page, displaying PAN controls for each channel in the current layer. scene number scene name EQ Enable indicator scrollable list of scene names and numbers EQ Enabled channel layer in selected scene The SCENE MEMORY RECALL function page includes the following information: ❑ current scene name and number (in the above example “P0” means “Preset 0”) ❑ EQ-enabled channel layers in the current scene (left side of page) ❑ a scrollable list of scene memory location names and numbers ❑ EQ-enabled channel layers in the scene selected in the list (right side of page) ❑ the bottom half of the function page is identical to the Channel Edit function page. It displays PAN controls for each channel in the current layer. Adjustments you make to the PAN controls will be saved with the scene. Scene Edit Indicator The VM200 features an EDIT indicator that lights up when you adjust any parameter in the scene, indicating that the current scene no longer exactly matches the parameters of the scene you recalled. Init Mix Init Mix PO PO EDIT indicator EDIT What Can You Store in a Scene? You can store the following VM200 mix settings in a scene: Section Channel (ch1–ch20) VM200 User’s Guide Items Ch fader, Ch on, Ch pan, AUX1–4 sends, Eff1/2 sends, AUX1&2 pan, AUX 3&4 pan, EQ/LO Gain/Freq/Q, EQ/LO-MID Gain/Freq/Q, EQ/HI-MID Gain/Freq/Q, EQ/LO Gain/Freq/Q, EQ on, Routing, Phase, Ch pair, Mute/Fader group, S/P DIF IN Master ST Buss master/on, AUX1–4 master/on, Eff1/2 master/on Scene Status EQ Enable, ADD AUX, AUX1–4 post/pre, Eff1/2 post/pre, AUX1&2 pair, AUX3&4 pair Others Scene name, Effects 1/2 selection 149 Scene Memory Preset Scene Memory The VM200 includes three preset scenes: P0, P1, and P2. These presets were designed as scenes you can quickly recall for three common purposes: ❑ Init Mix: For initial mixing ❑ Recording: For a typical recording situation ❑ Mix Down: For mixing down You can recall a preset scene, edit its parameters, and store it again under a new name. However, you cannot overwrite the pre-programmed settings of a preset scene. These preset programs are all quite similar; they differ only in the following settings and usage: EQ Enable ADD. AUX P0 Init_Mix 1–8 ON 1–20:ST Buss P1 Recording 1–8 OFF 1–8:Rec Buss Overdubbing or bounce recording via 9–20:ST Buss Rec Buss. ON 1–20:ST Buss ADAT mixdown # Name P2 Mix_Down 9–16 150 Routing Usage Normal mixing application, such as PA, live, etc. VM200 UserÕs Guide Recalling Mix Scenes Recalling Mix Scenes You can recall scenes from Scene Memory in three ways: ❑ manually ❑ automatically, when the power is turned on to the VM200 ❑ remotely using MIDI Program Change messages. You can recall preset scenes P0, P1, or P2, or any scene that has been saved to Scene Memory location 00 to 99. Recalling a Scene Manually 1. Press the Scene Memory [RECALL] key. The VM200 displays the SCENE MEMORY RECALL function page. 2. Use the Data Wheel or the [] keys to select a scene. The “EQ Enabled” readout on the right side of the display indicates the channel layers for which EQ is enabled. The readout changes to reflect the status of the scene highlighted by the cursor in the scrolling list. Also, if the ADD.AUX parameter is turned on for the selected scene program, “ADD.AUX” appears in this area of the display. See “Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Parameter)” on page 115 for more information. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selection. The VM200 loads the scene and returns to the previous mode. 3. Note: You cannot recall scenes titled “NO_DATA, because there is no data in the scene. Note: You can press the [EXIT] key to return to Channel Edit mode at any time, cancelling the scene memory recall process. Caution: When you recall a scene, volume levels may suddenly change because of changes in parameter values and fader settings. Before you recall the scene, lower the Master Fader or turn down the Monitor and Phones Gain controls as necessary to protect your ears and speakers. Also, if the Motor parameter is turned on, the faders may suddenly move automatically. Watch your fingers! Recalling a Scene Automatically at Start-up You can specify a scene to be recalled automatically when you power on the VM200. This is useful if you wish to start all sessions with a particular scene, or if you wish to continue working with the current scene in your next session. VM200 User’s Guide 151 Scene Memory You can select one of the following options: LAST-STORED, P0, P1, P2, 0–99. The default setting is “LAST-STORED,” which causes the most-recently stored scene to be recalled. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key five times. The VM200 displays the 5:PWR ON RCL function page. Use the Data Wheel or the [] keys to select a scene. You can select one of the following: ❑ any Preset scene (P0, P1, P2) ❑ any User scene (0-99) ❑ LAST-STORED (the last scene you stored) The selected item flashes in the Scene Number field in the lower left corner. 2. Note: 3. Press the [EXIT] key at any time to cancel this process. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selection. The next time you power on the VM200, the selected scene will be automatically recalled. Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages You can use MIDI Program Change messages to recall scenes for snapshot-style mix automation. You can transmit Program Change messages from a computer, MIDI sequencer, or MIDI keyboard. Most MIDI keyboards transmit a Program Change message when a voice is selected. You can use this message to recall a scene on the VM200. Using this technique, the synthesizer and VM200 can be reconfigured instantaneously. To recall scene memories using MIDI Program Change messages, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 152 Connect the VM200 to MIDI equipment capable of transmitting Program Change messages. See “Connecting MIDI devices” on page 175 for more information. Configure the VM200 to receive MIDI Program Change messages. See “Program Change Messages” on page 177 for more information. Assign Program Change messages to scene memories. See “Program Change To Scene Memory Assignment Tables” on page 210 for more information. VM200 User’s Guide Motorized Faders If you have set the Program Change/Tx parameter to On, the VM200 transmits a Program Change message each time you recall a scene. (The Program Change/Tx parameter appears on the Setup: MIDI 1:MIDI TX&RX function page. See “Program Change Messages” on page 177 for more information.) Using this capability, you can recall programs on other MIDI equipment, such as a tone program on a synthesizer. You can record transmission of Program Change messages from the VM200 to a MIDI sequencer to later automate mix scene changes. Refer to the “Using Program Change Messages to Recall Scenes” on page 180 for more information. Motorized Faders In order for the faders to move to their new positions automatically when you change scenes, the Motor parameter must be turned on. The Motor parameter appears on the SETUP: SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/MON function page. Follow the steps below to turn the motorized faders on or off. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key once to display the 1: CLOCK/MON function page. turning motorized faders on and off 2. Rotate the EQ/LO Q rotary control to turn the Motor parameter on or off. The default setting is “OFF.” Warning: VM200. Do not force the automated faders or you may damage the Note: If the Motor parameter is turned on, the fader will move suddenly and automatically when a new scene is recalled or the Fader Mode is changed. VM200 User’s Guide 153 Scene Memory Storing Mix Scenes You can store mix scenes in Scene memory locations 0–99. 1. Press the Scene Memory [STORE] key. The VM200 displays the SCENE MEMORY STORE function page. 2. Use the Data Wheel or the [] keys to select a scene memory location to which you wish to store the current scene. Press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 displays the SCENE MEMORY NAME EDIT function page. 3. character-selector cursor 4. character set box title box The SCENE MEMORY NAME EDIT function page includes a character set box that displays all the letters of the alphabet, as well as numerals and punctuation symbols. You can use these characters to name or title the scene memory. You can use any Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls to select the characters for the title. The Gain rotary control moves the cursor position left and right in the title box. The Freq rotary control moves the character-selector up and down the matrix; the Q rotary control moves the character-selector left and right. You can also press the [] keys to move the cursor and rotate the Data Wheel to select characters or numbers. Use the Freq and Q rotary controls to select a character, then turn the Gain control one notch right to move the cursor to the next space in the name, and repeat the process. The “Space to End” option will complete your title with blank spaces. Note: Press the [EXIT] key at any time to cancel this process and return to Channel Edit mode. 154 VM200 User’s Guide Storing Mix Scenes 5. When you’ve finished naming the scene, press the [ENTER] key. The following warning message appears on the display. The VM200 stores the scene into the selected Scene Memory location and returns to the previous mode. Warning: Do not power off the VM200 while it is writing to the flash memory or you may damage the system. VM200 User’s Guide 155 Scene Memory Editing Scene Memory Titles You can edit scene names by recalling a scene and re-naming it. Refer to the “Recalling Mix Scenes” on page 151 and “Storing Mix Scenes” on page 154 for more information. Recall Safe Function When you recall a scene, all parameters are updated with settings from the new scene. However, in some cases you may wish to retain the settings for specific channels or parameters. The VM200 features a Recall Safe function that enables you to designate channels and certain parameters as “recall safe.” When a new scene is recalled, “safe” channels and parameters are not updated. Recall Safe settings are available for each input channel 1-20 and for the following parameters: ❑ Channel Fader ❑ Channel Pan ❑ Channel On ❑ Routing ❑ AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4 ❑ EFF1, EFF2 ❑ EQ ❑ EQ On You can specify safe channels using the CH RCL SAFE function page. You can specify safe parameters on the RCL SAFE function page. Specifying Recall Safe Channels The VM200 features a Recall Safe function that enables you to designate input channels 1-20 as “recall safe.” When a new scene is recalled, “safe” channels are not updated. 1. 2. Press the [SYSTEM] key three times. The VM200 displays the 3:CH RCL SAFE function page. All selectable [EQ EDIT] keys flash. Select a channel layer by pressing Page Select key [1–8 ANALOG IN], [9–16 ADAT IN], or [17–20 EFF RTN]. 156 VM200 User’s Guide Specifying Recall Safe Parameters 3. 4. Press the [EQ EDIT] keys of target channels to designate them “safe” from being overwritten by recalled parameters. The [EQ EDIT] indicators of the recall safe channels light up, and the [EQ EDIT] indicators of the non-safe channels continue to flash. The box indicators of the recall safe channels are highlighted. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. Specifying Recall Safe Parameters The VM200 features a Recall Safe function that enables you to designate specific parameters as “recall safe.” When a new scene is recalled, “safe” parameters are not updated. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key three times. The VM200 displays the 1:CH RCL SAFE function page. 2. Use the EQ Gain, Freq, and Q rotary controls for each parameter to turn Recall Safe on or off. The default setting is all Off. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key to return to Channel Edit mode. 3. VM200 User’s Guide 157 Scene Memory 158 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Digital Connections RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 10 LO About This Chapter IT ON LO ON ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO This chapter describes the VM200’s digital inputs and outputs, including the ADAT and S/P DIF digital connectors, word clock masters and slaves, and how to cascade multiple VM200s. LO -20 -30 0 +1 -30 0 0 +1 -40 -20 -10 ON 0 +1 -30 -40 0 -20 -10 - ON -30 0 0 +1 -40 - -60 -40 -30 -20 -40 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - PA I GR R/ OU P 0 +1 -30 0 -20 4 12 20 -10 - -40 -20 -10 - ON ON 6 14 -10 0 SO LO LO SO LO SO - 0 +1 ON EQ LO SO ED EQ 160 162 162 162 163 164 165 165 165 165 166 166 168 168 169 169 171 5 13 0 LO SO IT ED PA N ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N IT ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 -10 EQ Q FR EQ Q PA N EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 0 +1 ED ON IT PA N ID -M N GA I /LO EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -10 0 LO SO FR EQ EQ ED ON IT Digital Connections, Word Clocks, and Sample Rates . Word Clock Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD IN/OUT Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Master Word Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the VM200 as Master or Slave. . . . . . . . . . . Multitrack Recording and Mastering to a DAT. . . . . Digital I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAT IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using ADAT IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using ADAT OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Channels to ADAT DIRECT SENDs . . . . . S/P DIF IN/OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using S/P DIF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using S/P DIF IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning S/P DIF Signals to Channels. . . . . . . . . . Cascading the VM200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 PA N 0 SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ Chapter Contents VM200 User’s Guide 159 Digital Connections Digital Connections, Word Clocks, and Sample Rates The VM200 is equipped with two types of digital connectors: an ADAT interface and S/P DIF In and Out connectors. These connectors enable you to interface the VM200 to other digital components in your recording studio. You can use the ADAT interface to connect to any ADAT-compatible recorder, such as the FOSTEX VR800 or an Alesis ADAT. For more information “ADAT IN/OUT” on page 165 and “S/P DIF IN/OUT” on page 168. This section reviews some basic issues involved in setting up a digital recording environment. (If you’ve worked with digital audio equipment before, you are probably already familiar with word clock synchronization issues and can skip this section.) The following illustration shows a typical waveform. Technically, this graph represents force along the vertical axis (i.e., the force an audio speaker requires to move a certain amount of air to create sound), and time along the horizontal axis. The waveform is an analogy for the soundwave position at specific points in time. (Musically, however, this waveform could represent your next big hit :-) force time A digital-to-analog (D/A) audio converter takes numerous tiny samples of such a waveform each second, and converts the sample data to digital binary digital information. The number of samples taken each second is called the “sample rate.” The VM200, like many current digital devices, can sample at a rate of 44,100 times per second (44.1kHz) or 48,000 times per second (48kHz). Each time the converter samples the waveform, it records waveform data as a binary number in a format called a “word.” A bit is a unit of data, a single digit in a word, the “one-or-zero,” “on-or-off” fundamental encoding of the digital universe. For instance, 1011011110111001 is a 16-bit binary word. It contains 16 digits or “bits” of data. If you are using 16-bit words, your system is said to have a bit-rate of 16 bits. (This is also called the “bit resolution.”) A word clock is a clock signal that you can use to synchronize all the devices in a digital audio system. If the VM200 is the only digital audio component in your studio, you don’t need to worry about setting the word clock. (The VM200 will synchronize to its own internal word clock.) However, if you use a second digital device, such as a DAT or digital multitrack recorder, you must designate one device the word clock master and the rest slaves. You may need to change word clock settings on occasion, such as when you record from a DAT or CD player. If the word clocks are not correctly synchronized throughout your 160 VM200 User’s Guide Digital Connections, Word Clocks, and Sample Rates system, noise or glitches may creep into your mixes. Each device in a digital system may utilize a different word length, because most digital devices are capable of interpreting words and truncating or protracting their length. However, it is important that every component in your digital audio system do two things: ❑ utilize the same sample rate (44.1 or 48kHz) ❑ synchronize with a designated word clock master. Note: Word clocks differ from SMPTE or MIDI timecode, which are used to synchronize MIDI sequencers and audio recorders. Word clocks synchronize the digital audio processing circuits in each digital audio device. The word clock signal runs at the same frequency as the sampling rate. The VM200 generates its own word clock at 44.1 kHz (the industry-standard sampling rate for music CDs) and can be used as the word clock master. (In general, if your work is destined for CD, it is probably best to use the 44.1 kHz sampling rate.) Alternatively, you can use the VM200 as a word clock slave synchronized to an external word clock in the range of 44.1kHz to 48kHz, +/-6%. Be aware of the following word clock guidelines: ❑ You can distribute word clock signals via dedicated cables or derive them from standard digital audio connections. ❑ If all devices share a common word clock, leave all the devices powered on, even if they’re not being used. ❑ First turn on the word clock master, then the slaves. ❑ When you shut down the system, first turn off the slaves, then the master. ❑ Before a recording session, make sure that all word clock slaves are synchronized to the master word clock. For more information, refer to the documentation for each device. VM200 User’s Guide 161 Digital Connections Word Clock Setup The VM200’s internal word clock generator supports a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, the audio standard for music CDs. You may also synchronize the VM200 to an external word clock. WORD IN/OUT Connectors These BNC connectors receive/transmit the word clock. You can connect a device that has a WORD IN/OUT connector, such as the Fostex VR800 digital multitrack recorder, to these connectors. If the VM200 is the last device in the word clock chain, set the word clock termination switch to ON. WORD WORD IN/OUT 75 ON OFF IN OUT word clock termination switch Setting the Master Word Clock Follow the steps below to set the master word clock. 162 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key. The VM200 displays the SYSTEM function page. 2. Rotate the EQ/LO Gain control to select a master clock from the following options: INT44 Select this option to use the VM200 as the word clock master. ADAT44 Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave, syncing to the clock from an ADAT-compatible machine running at 44.1kHz. ADAT48 Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave, syncing to the clock from an ADAT-compatible pro audio machine running at 48kHz. S/PDIF44 Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave, syncing to the clock from a CD player or S/PDIF-compatible machine running at 44.1kHz. S/PDIF48 Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave, syncing to the clock from a connected CD player or S/P DIF-compatible machine running at 48kHz. VM200 UserÕs Guide Setting the VM200 as Master or Slave WORD44 Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave, syncing to the clock from a connected FOSTEX VR800 digital multitrack recorder, or a digital device equipped with a WORD OUT connector, running at 44.1kHz. WORD48 Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave, syncing to the clock coming from a connected digital device equipped with a WORD OUT connector that is running at 48kHz. Caution: Selecting an inappropriate sampling frequency will interfere with normal recording and playback. Note: If the VM200 is only the digital device in your system, use the default setting of INT44. 3. 4. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection. The VM200 displays the previous function page. If you select any option other than “INT44” in step 2, and the VM200 is the last device in the word clock chain, turn the WORD IN Termination ON/OFF switch to ON on the rear panel. WORD 75 WORD IN Termination ON/OFF switch ON OFF IN OUT Setting the VM200 as Master or Slave The following examples illustrate the VM200 in various recording configurations, being used as both word clock master and word clock slave. Recording to a Digital Multitrack Recorder or DAT In this example, a stereo signal is recorded to a DAT recorder. The VM200 is the word clock master; the DAT recorder is the word clock slave. Set the Master Word Clock parameter on the VM200 to “INT44.” The VM200 will generate the word clock and the DAT recorder will slave to it. VM200 is the word clock MASTER S/PDIF OUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR PHONES A 2TRK IN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -16 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -60 +10 B PAD 26dB TRIM -16 TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 -34 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN MAX METER OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STORE RECALL STORE KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW FADER MODE AUX1 /-1 AUX2 AUX3 +1/ EXIT AUX4 DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 ADD.AUX EFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -10 EFF2 -20 -30 CHANNEL ENTER -40 ADAT IN EFF RTN VM200 User’s Guide - - - ANALOG IN 1 9 17 2 10 18 - 3 11 19 - - 4 12 20 5 13 - - 6 14 -60 7 15 - 8 16 MASTER 163 Digital Connections Mixing a CD Source and Recording to a Digital Multitrack Recorder In this example, a signal from a CD player is mixed with a signal from an ADAT-compatible digital multitrack recorder, such as the Fostex VR800, and recorded to the digital multitrack recorder. The CD player serves as the word clock master, and uses a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz. The VM200 and the digital multitrack recorder are word clock slaves, both syncing to the CD player word clock. Set the Master Word Clock parameter on the VM200 to “SPDIF44.” The VM200 is word clock SLAVE. Word Clock Master INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 5 INPUT 4 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR S/PDIF OUT PHONES CD player A A A A 2TRK IN 26dB -16 +10 -34 +10 26dB 26dB TRIM -60 PAD PAD PAD 26dB B B B B PAD TRIM -16 TRIM -60 -34 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 +10 -16 +10 -34 TRIM -10 -60 -50 -10 TRIM TRIM -10 -50 -10 -50 GAIN -50 MIN -34 GAIN MIN MAX MAX METER S/PDIF IN OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO CURRENT SCENE STATUS Digital in ADAT OUT PAGE SELECT RECALL EFF LIBRARY STORE RECALL STORE OPTICAL ACCESS OL 0 6 12 24 KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE 1 PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Digital out SCENE MEMORY SOLO ON ADAT IN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A SYNC RECORD TRACK 1 2 6 7 3 4 5 IN OUT END IN OUT STORE EDIT UNDO / REDO DISP SEL SETUP AUTO RTN 8 CLIPBOARD EXIT / NO AUTO PUNCH START EXECUTE / YES Digital MTR FADER MODE AUX1 /-1 AUX2 +1/ PREVIEW HOLD/ AUX3 EXIT AUX4 DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 PGM SEL 0 +10 AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY VARI PITCH ADD.AUX 0 EFF1 EJECT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LOCATE TIME BASE SEL JOG SHUTTLE SCRUB -10 EFF2 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 SHIFT -20 -10 -30 CHANNEL -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -30 -40 -30 -40 ADAT IN EFF RTN -30 -30 -40 5 13 4 12 20 6 14 - 7 15 8 16 WORD OUT WORD IN -60 -40 - - LOC MEM STOP RECORD -30 -40 - - 3 11 19 -30 -40 -40 - 2 10 18 1 9 17 ANALOG IN -30 -40 - - P.EDIT ENTER -20 -40 -30 - PLAY REW F FWD CLIPBOARD PLAY LOCATE ABS 0 LOCATE REC END AUTO PUNCH MASTER Multitrack Recording and Mastering to a DAT In this example, an audio signal is recorded to an ADAT-compatible digital multitrack recorder, such as the Fostex VR800, while also being mixed from the digital multitrack, and sent to a DAT master recorder. The digital multitrack recorder is the word clock master. The VM200 and the DAT machine slave to it. Set the Master Word Clock parameter on the VM200 to “ADAT44” or “ADAT 48,” depending on the sampling frequency of the digital multitrack recorder. (If you are using the Fostex VR800 digital multitrack recorder, set this parameter to “ADAT44.”) The VM200 is word clock SLAVE. INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR PHONES A 2TRK IN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -16 +10 -34 +10 -34 -16 +10 DAT 26dB TRIM -60 S/PDIF OUT PAD 26dB TRIM -60 B PAD 26dB TRIM -16 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 +10 -34 -10 -60 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN S/PDIF IN MAX METER OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO ADAT OUT PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO RECALL Digital in EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY CURRENT SCENE STATUS EFF LIBRARY STORE RECALL OPTICAL STORE ACCESS OL 0 6 12 24 KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE 1 PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SOLO 2 3 4 5 6 CHANNEL/ METER ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 A SYNC STORE MMC SEND CH VIEW 7 SCENE MEMORY RECALL ADAT IN ON Digital out RECORD TRACK 1 2 6 3 4 5 IN OUT END IN OUT STORE EDIT UNDO / REDO DISP SEL SETUP VARI PITCH AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY LOCATE TIME BASE SEL SCRUB AUTO RTN 7 8 CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH START EXIT / NO EXECUTE / YES FADER MODE AUX1 /-1 AUX2 +1/ PREVIEW HOLD/ AUX3 Digital MTR EXIT AUX4 PGM SEL DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 ADD.AUX EFF1 EJECT JOG SHUTTLE EFF2 SHIFT -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -30 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 P.EDIT LOC MEM -20 -10 CHANNEL ENTER RECORD -20 STOP PLAY REW F FWD -40 -30 -30 -30 -40 -40 -30 -40 -30 -40 - - - -30 -40 - -30 -40 -30 -40 - - -60 -40 - - - WORD IN ANALOG IN ADAT IN EFF RTN 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 WORD OUT AUTO PUNCH CLIPBOARD PLAY LOCATE ABS 0 LOCATE REC END MASTER Word Clock Master 164 VM200 User’s Guide Digital I/Os Digital I/Os The VM200 features two types of digital ins and outs: ADAT IN/OUT and S/PDIF IN/OUT. ADAT IN/OUT ADAT IN OUT ADAT is a digital audio format developed by the Alesis Corporation that enables eight channels of digital audio to flow through a single optical cable. It includes eight digital inputs and eight assignable digital outputs and can be directly connected to digital multitrack recorders. You can connect any ADAT-compatible recorder to these connectors, including an Alesis ADAT, Alesis ADAT-XT, Fostex VR-800, and others. Using ADAT IN You can use an optical cable to connect the ADAT IN connector on the VM200 to the ADAT Out connector on an Alesis ADAT or other ADAT-compatible device, such as the Fostex VR800. The signal, which carries eight-channel data from the ADAT IN connector, will be assigned to input channels 9 through 16 on the VM200. . INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 4 A INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM GAIN PHONES A 2TRK IN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 B PAD 26dB TRIM TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 -34 -50 -10 -10 -50 -10 -50 -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN MAX METER OL ADAT IN -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO OPTICAL ACCESS OL 0 6 SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN GAIN EQ/HI SELECTED EQ GAIN EQ ON 12 DATA OUT PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN EFF EDIT EFF1 24 1 FREQ Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q 3 4 5 6 7 8 A SYNC RECORD TRACK 1 EQ LIBRARY CURRENT SCENE STATUS 2 EFF2 2 3 4 6 5 RECALL STORE RECALL STORE AUTO RTN CLIPBOARD IN OUT END IN OUT STORE EDIT UNDO / REDO DISP SEL SETUP VARI PITCH AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY LOCATE TIME BASE SEL SCRUB START PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT KEY MODE PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL WORD IN PREVIEW HOLD/ FADER MODE /-1 AUX2 +1/ WORD OUT SHIFT P.EDIT RECORD AUTO PUNCH AUX3 EXECUTE / YES VR800 PGM SEL CHANNEL/ METER AUX1 EXIT / NO EJECT STORE MMC SEND CH VIEW 8 Q AUTO PUNCH ROUTING/ PHASE 7 EFF LIBRARY EXIT AUX4 JOG SHUTTLE LOC MEM STOP PLAY REW F FWD CLIPBOARD PLAY LOCATE ABS 0 LOCATE REC END DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 ADD.AUX EFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 EFF2 -30 CHANNEL -20 -20 ENTER -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -40 -30 -30 -40 ANALOG IN ADAT IN EFF RTN 1 9 17 2 10 18 - 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 - - 6 14 -60 -40 -40 - - -30 -30 -40 -40 -40 -40 - -30 -30 -30 -30 -40 - - 7 15 - 8 16 MASTER In this example, a Fostex VR800 is connected to the ADAT IN connector on the VM200 to mix from a digital source. The VR800 serves as the word clock master; the VM200 is the word clock slave. The VR800 WORD OUT connector transmits the word clock to the WORD IN connector on the VM200. Set the Word Clock parameter on the VM200 to “WORD44,” and make sure that the WORD IN switch on the rear panel is turned on. If a connected ADAT-compatible device does not have a WORD OUT connector, set the Word Clock parameter on the VM200 to “ADAT44” or “ADAT48” depending on the sampling frequency of the source. For more information on the master word clock setup, refer to “Setting the Master Word Clock” on page 162. VM200 UserÕs Guide 165 Digital Connections Using ADAT OUT You can use an optical cable to connect the ADAT OUT connector on the VM200 to an ADAT-compatible recorder, such as the Fostex VR800 digital multitrack recorder. The ADAT OUT connector outputs the same information as the REC BUSS, but in digital form. The left channel of the REC BUSS stereo signal is output to tracks 1, 3, 5, and 7, and the right channel to tracks 2, 4, 6, and 8. You can send channel 1–8 signals to ADAT DIRECT using the ROUTING function page. The channel 1 signal is output to ADAT track 1, the channel 2 signal is output to ADAT track 2, etc. . INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR optical cable PHONES A 2TRK IN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -16 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -60 +10 B PAD 26dB TRIM -16 TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 -34 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN MAX METER OL -3 -6 OPTICAL VM200 -9 -12 -18 ACCESS OL 0 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 6 -36 12 DATA IN -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A SYNC RECORD TRACK 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN 9-16 ADAT IN 17-20 EFF RTN AUTO RTN SETUP EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q AUTO PUNCH EFF EDIT START EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO STORE RECALL CLIPBOARD STORE ADAT OUT IN OUT STORE EDIT END IN OUT UNDO / REDO DISP SEL SETUP PREVIEW HOLD/ EXIT / NO EXECUTE / YES VR800 EJECT PGM SEL AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY VARI PITCH LOCATE TIME BASE SEL SCRUB JOG SHUTTLE KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP SHIFT REC BUSS SOLO SOLO P.EDIT LOC MEM SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW RECORD ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STOP PLAY REW F FWD ON AUTO PUNCH CLIPBOARD PLAY LOCATE ABS 0 LOCATE REC END FADER MODE AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 /-1 +1/ EXIT DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 ADD.AUX 0 EFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 EFF2 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -10 -30 CHANNEL -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 ENTER -20 -40 -30 -30 -40 ANALOG IN ADAT IN EFF RTN -30 -40 1 9 17 -30 -40 2 10 18 5 13 -30 -40 - - 4 12 20 -30 -40 -40 - 3 11 19 -30 -30 -40 - - - 6 14 -60 -40 - - 7 15 - 8 16 MASTER In this configuration, the VM200 is the word clock master and the multitrack recorder or ADAT is the slave. Set the Word Clock parameter on the VM200 to “INT44.” For more information on the master word clock setup, refer to “Setting the Master Word Clock” on page 162. To route a digital signal to ADAT OUT, follow the steps below: Assigning Channels to ADAT DIRECT SENDs Note: The VM200 is unable to route signals from channels 9–16 (ADAT IN) and channels 17–20 (EFF TN) to the ADAT DIRECT SEND. 1. 2. 166 Press the Page Select [1–8 ANALOG IN] key to select the 1–8 channel layer. The [1–8 ANALOG IN] key lights up. Press the [ROUTING/PHASE] key. The VM200 displays the 1: ROUTING function page. The [ROUTING/PHASE] key and selectable [EQ EDIT] keys flash; selected [EQ EDIT] keys light up. The ROUTING function page features a 3-by-20 matrix. The top row of the matrix, labelled “DIRECT,” indicates which channels have been sent to the ADAT OUT. VM200 User’s Guide Assigning Channels to ADAT DIRECT SENDs 3. 4. Use the [EQ EDIT] keys to turn on the channels you wish to send to the ADAT OUT. Selected [EQ EDIT] keys light up. On the display, the “DIRECT” indicators highlight (darken). In the example above, channels 1–8 are sent directly to the corresponding ADAT channels. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. Note: The Rec Buss also sends the left signal to channels 1, 3, 5 and 7, and the right signal to channels 2, 4, 6 and 8 so that you can route them to ADAT OUT 1–8 directly. This configuration enables you to send two mixes to two different external recorders at the same time. VM200 User’s Guide 167 Digital Connections S/P DIF IN/OUT S/P DIF IN OUT The VM200 features S/P DIF digital in and out connectors on the rear panel. “S/PDIF” is an abbreviation for the Sony/Philips Digital InterFace, a digital format that enables two channels of digital audio to flow through an RCA connector (coaxial) or an optical cable. The VM200 requires an optical S/P DIF connection. Using S/P DIF OUT The VM200 outputs the ST BUSS signal in digital S/P DIF format from the S/P DIF Out optical connector on the rear panel. You can connect this output to any digital device that features an S/P DIF Optical input, such as a DAT recorder or MiniDisc recorder to mixdown in stereo. You can also connect the S/P DIF out to the S/P DIF IN of another VM200 in a cascade configuration. See “Cascading the VM200” on page 171 for more information. INPUT 1 . INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR PHONES A 2TRK IN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -16 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -60 +10 B PAD 26dB TRIM -16 TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 -34 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN MAX DIGITAL IN METER OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q DAT S/P DIF OUT PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP SYSTEM EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STORE RECALL STORE KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW FADER MODE AUX1 /-1 AUX2 AUX3 +1/ EXIT AUX4 DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 ADD.AUX EFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 EFF2 -30 CHANNEL -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 ENTER -20 -40 -30 -30 ANALOG IN ADAT IN EFF RTN -30 -40 -40 1 9 17 -30 -40 2 10 18 -30 -40 - - - 3 11 19 -30 -40 - 4 12 20 -30 -40 5 13 -30 -40 - - 6 14 -60 -40 - - 7 15 optical cable - 8 16 MASTER In this example, the VM200 S/P DIF output is connected to the digital input of a DAT recorder for digital mixdown recording. The VM200 serves as the word clock master; the DAT is a word clock slave. Set the “Master Word Clock” parameter on the V200 to “INT44.” Refer to “Setting the Master Word Clock” on page 162 for more information. If you select the digital input on the DAT recorder as the recording source, the DAT should automatically synchronize to the word clock signal from the VM200. On some DAT recorders, you may need to specify the word clock source. Refer to the instructions supplied with your DAT recorder. Note: If the connected digital device has only the COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack as a digital input, use a Fostex COP-1 (an optical-to-coaxial converter). 168 VM200 User’s Guide Using S/P DIF IN Note: Make sure that signals are routed to ST Buss so that they are also output to the S/P DIF OUT. (See “Routing Input Channels” on page 66 for more information.) Using S/P DIF IN You can connect the S/P DIF output from a CD player, DAT, or MiniDisc player to the S/P DIF IN optical connector on the rear panel of the VM200. You can also connect the S/P DIF output from a second VM200 to the S/P DIF IN optical connector in a cascade configuration. See “Cascading the VM200” on page 171 for more information. . INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR PHONES A 2TRK IN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -16 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -60 +10 B PAD 26dB TRIM -16 TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM TRIM -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 -34 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN TRIM -10 -50 -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN MAX DIGITAL OUT METER OL -3 -6 VM200 -9 -12 -18 DAT DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO S/P DIF IN PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN SETUP 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM MIDI 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STORE RECALL STORE KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE PAIR/ GROUP REC BUSS SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW FADER MODE AUX1 /-1 AUX2 AUX3 +1/ EXIT AUX4 DATA +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 ADD.AUX EFF1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -10 EFF2 -20 -30 CHANNEL ENTER optical cable -40 ANALOG IN ADAT IN EFF RTN - - - 1 9 17 2 10 18 - 3 11 19 - - 4 12 20 5 13 - - 6 14 -60 7 15 - 8 16 MASTER In this connection example, a DAT machine is connected to the S/P DIF OUT connector on the rear panel of the VM200 to enable mixing from a digital source. The DAT machine serves as word clock master, and the VM200 is word clock slave. You need to set the Master Word Clock setting to “S/P DIF44” or “S/P DIF48” depending on the sample frequency of the source. For more information on the master word clock setup, refer to “Setting the Master Word Clock” on page 162. Note: If the connected digital device has only the COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack as a digital output, use a Fostex COP-1 optical-to-coaxial converter. Assigning S/P DIF Signals to Channels Follow these steps to assign a two-channel digital stereo signal (input via S/P DIF IN) to specific channels: 1. VM200 User’s Guide Press the [ROUTING/PHASE] key twice. The [ROUTING/PHASE] key and selectable [EQ EDIT] keys flash, and the VM200 displays the 2:S/P DIF IN function page. 169 Digital Connections 2. Press the [EQ EDIT] keys for channels to which you wish to send the S/P DIF signal. You can assign multiple channels. Note: Since S/P DIF carries a two-channel signal, you must always set the channels in pairs. For example, if you select channel 1 to assign S/P DIF signal, channel 2 will be also selected and paired. You do not need to pair the channels using the Pairing function in this case. 3. 170 On the display, the indicators for the assigned channel pairs highlight (darken), and their [EQ EDIT] keys light up in paired unison. In the example above, channels 7–8 are assigned to receive the S/P DIF signal. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key or [EXIT] key. The VM200 displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. VM200 User’s Guide Cascading the VM200 Cascading the VM200 You can connect up to three VM200s together in a cascade configuration to enable 36-plus channels of digital mixing. A two-mixer cascade is illustrated below. S/P DIF OUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A INPUT 3 A INPUT 5 INPUT 4 A INPUT 6 INPUT 7 S/P DIF IN MONITOR INPUT 8 PHONES INPUT 1 INPUT 2 A A INPUT 3 A INPUT 4 A INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 MONITOR TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM GAIN B B PAD B PAD 26dB -16 -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 -34 -16 +10 -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 TRIM -50 -10 TRIM -10 -50 GAIN TRIM -10 -50 -50 MIN -34 GAIN MAX MIN -60 -16 +10 -34 +10 PAD 26dB 26dB TRIM -16 B PAD 26dB TRIM MAX B PAD 26dB TRIM TRIM -34 B PAD 26dB TRIM -60 2TRK IN PAD 26dB TRIM B B PAD 26dB TRIM TRIM -60 -34 -16 +10 TRIM -60 -16 -10 -60 +10 -34 -50 -10 -10 -50 -10 -50 -50 MIN -34 METER -6 VM200 -18 -18 -36 -48 L R ST BUSS/SOLO L R ST BUSS/SOLO PAGE SELECT 9-16 ADAT IN 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID 1-8 ANALOG IN EQ/HI-MID GAIN GAIN EQ/HI SELECTED EQ GAIN EQ ON Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q SETUP EFF EDIT EFF1 EFF2 EQ LIBRARY FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS EQ/HI-MID GAIN EQ/HI GAIN SELECTED EQ GAIN STORE RECALL EFF EDIT EFF1 EQ ON FREQ CURRENT SCENE STATUS Q FREQ FREQ Q FREQ Q EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON STORE RECALL STORE KEY MODE PAIR/ GROUP ROUTING/ PHASE REC BUSS SOLO PAIR/ GROUP SCENE MEMORY RECALL REC BUSS STORE SOLO SCENE MEMORY RECALL STORE MMC SEND CHANNEL/ METER CH VIEW FADER MODE FADER MODE /-1 AUX2 +1/ EXIT AUX4 AUX1 /-1 AUX2 AUX3 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +1/ EXIT AUX4 DATA +10 DATA 0 +10 ADD.AUX EFF1 EFF2 EQ LIBRARY STORE PAN CHANNEL/ METER AUX3 17-20 EFF RTN EQ/LO-MID GAIN EQ EDIT MMC SEND AUX1 MIDI EFF LIBRARY Q RECALL 9-16 ADAT IN EQ/LO SYSTEM KEY MODE ROUTING/ PHASE CH VIEW DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 -36 -48 PAGE SELECT 1-8 ANALOG IN GAIN VM200 -9 -12 DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER -24 EQ/LO MAX -3 -6 -9 MIDI MIN OL -3 SETUP GAIN MAX METER OL -12 SYSTEM PHONES A 2TRK IN +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0 ADD.AUX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 EFF2 EFF1 -30 CHANNEL ENTER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 EFF2 -30 CHANNEL -40 ADAT IN EFF RTN - - - ANALOG IN 1 9 17 2 10 18 - 3 11 19 - - 4 12 20 5 13 7 15 VM200-A -40 -60 - - 6 14 ANALOG IN MASTER ADAT IN EFF RTN - - - - 8 16 ENTER 1 9 17 2 10 18 - 3 11 19 - - 4 12 20 5 13 - - 6 14 -60 7 15 - 8 16 MASTER VM200-B In this figure, the stereo buss signal flows from the VM200-A S/P DIF OUT to the VM200-B S/P DIF IN. (S/P DIF OUT outputs the stereo buss signal in digital form.) VM200-A serves as word clock master. Its Clock parameter is set to INT44. (You can access the Clock parameter by pressing the [SYSTEM] key to display the 1:CLOCK/MON function page as shown below.) The other VM200 serves as word clock slave. Its Clock parameters is set to SPDIF44. Refer to “Setting the Master Word Clock” on page 162 for more information on word clock. To configure multiple VM200s in a cascade, follow these steps: 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key. The VM200 displays the Setup:System 1:CLOCK/MON function page. 2. Rotate the EQ/LO Freq rotary control to select one of the following options: 3. VM200 User’s Guide OFF This is the default setting. The VM200s will not cascade. ON-A The Cascade function is turned on. Channels 7 and 8 are disabled. ON-B The Cascade function is turned on. Channels 15 and 16 are disabled. ON-C The Cascade function is turned on. Channels 19 and 20 are disabled. Press the [EXIT] key or [CHANNEL/METER] key. 171 Digital Connections The VM200 exits Setup mode and displays the CHANNEL EDIT function page. Note: When you attempt to cascade multiple VM200s, be certain not to assign S/P DIF IN to any channels, or the cascade operation will fail. (You can check assignments by pressing the [ROUTING/PHASE] key twice to display the S/P DIF IN function page.) Refer to “Assigning S/P DIF Signals to Channels” on page 169. 172 VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG VM200 & MIDI RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI CHAPTER 11 LO About This Chapter -20 EF IT ON EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO MIDI is an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which is an international technology standard that facilitates the exchange of musical data between digital devices. LO ON LO -10 0 -10 - -40 6 14 -20 -30 -40 - 5 13 -40 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - PA I GR R/ OU P 0 +1 -30 0 -20 4 12 20 -10 - -40 -30 ON 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 EQ -10 ED IT ON 0 +1 SO 0 LO EQ -10 ED ON -40 -30 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 -10 - ON -40 0 +1 -30 0 SO LO -20 EQ ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N 174 174 176 180 184 188 189 192 194 - 0 +1 ON IT ED PA N FR EQ Q PA N -30 0 LO -20 Using the VM200 with MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Program Change Messages to Recall Scenes . . . . . . Using Control Change Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Parameters Using Fostex Exclusive Messages . Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMC (MIDI Machine Control) Send. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO Q N GA I EQ /LO -M ID EQ -10 ED ON IT 0 -60 +1 Chapter Contents PA N -40 -30 0 SO FR LO EQ EQ -20 ED ON IT PA N SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ This chapter explains the MIDI-related capabilities of the VM200, including its MIDI ports and parameters, as well as MIDI Machine Control (MMC). This chapter also features several illustrations of various system configurations involving MIDI. VM200 User’s Guide 173 VM200 & MIDI Using the VM200 with MIDI Using MIDI with the VM200 enables you to take fullest advantage of all the VM200’s capabilities. You can send MIDI Program Change messages to recall scenes from Scene Memory, or send MIDI Control Change messages to enable real-time parameter control. Fostex System Exclusive messages similarly enable additional parameter control. To backup and transfer data between two VM200s, you can use System Exclusive Bulk Dump commands. If a recorder is connected to the VM200, you can control it remotely via MIDI Machine Control (MMC). You can also cascade multiple VM200s via MIDI connections and remotely operate the VM200 via MIDI Local Control. MIDI Ports The VM200 has standard MIDI IN, MIDI OUT, and MIDI THRU ports on the rear panel. The MIDI IN port receives MIDI messages. The MIDI OUT port transmits MIDI messages. The MIDI THRU ports transmits the exact same MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port. In addition to various MIDI instruments and devices, you can connect a personal computer to the MIDI ports using a MIDI interface. 174 VM200 User’s Guide Connecting MIDI devices Connecting MIDI devices The system illustrated below uses a standard MIDI interface to connect the VM200, a MIDI keyboard, and a MIDI sampler to a computer. MIDI IN serial port MIDI sequencer MIDI MIDI OUT MIDI IN interface MIDI keyboard MIDI IN VM200 MIDI sampler Cascading Two VM200s In the configuration illustrated below, two VM200s are cascaded (linked) together via MIDI. This type of connection enables you, for example, to perform the following functions on both machines while operating only one: • Recall, store, and change the name of scene memories • Update the display • Control Solo mode MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN Note: When you cascade two VM200s, be sure to set the ECHO parameter on 1: MIDI TX&RX page to “OFF” to avoid message loop. VM200 User’s Guide 175 VM200 & MIDI MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels This section explains the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels. Press the [MIDI] key to display the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page. This page enables you to set the transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) channels for the VM200. TX CH (Transmit Channel) This parameter specifies the MIDI Transmit Channel. This is the channel the VM200 will use to transmit MIDI messages. Select a channel from 1 through 16. Set the device that will receive MIDI messages from the VM200 to the same MIDI Channel. When the VM200 receives a request for MIDI data, it transmits a response on the same MIDI channel that received the request. The default setting is “1.” RX CH (Receive Channel) This parameter specifies the MIDI Receive Channel. This is the channel on which the VM200 will receive MIDI messages. Select a channel from 1 through 16, or “Omni.” Set the device that will transmit MIDI messages to the VM200 to the same MIDI Channel. If you select OMNI for the RX CH parameter, the target messages (Program Change or Control Change) will be received on all channels. The default setting is “Omni.” ECHO The ECHO parameter enables you to “echo” Program Change, Control Change, or System Exclusive messages that are received by the VM200 through to the MIDI OUT port, regardless of the MIDI Channel settings. The default setting is “Off.” 176 VM200 User’s Guide Program Change Messages Program Change Messages You can send a Program Change message to the VM200 to recall a scene from the VM200’s Scene Memory. (For more information, see “Using Program Change Messages to Recall Scenes” on page 180.) Inversely, by recalling a scene on the VM200, you can transmit Program Change messages to connected MIDI devices or instruments. Program Change TX The Program Change TX parameter determines whether the VM200 will transmit Program Change messages when you recall a scene from Scene Memory. Turn the Program Change TX parameter on if you want to change programs on a connected synthesizer when you change scenes on the VM200. The default setting is “On.” Program Change RX The Program Change RX parameter determines whether the VM200 will recall a scene from Scene Memory when the VM200 receives a Program Change message. Turn the Program Change RX parameter on if you want to change scenes on the VM200 from a connected sequencer. The default setting is “On.” Program Change Table The Program Change Table assigns program change numbers to scenes in Scene Memory. These assignments enable you to send MIDI messages from an external MIDI device to recall scenes on the VM200. For example, you could assign Program Change Number 07 to Scene 07. If you then send Program Change Number 07 from a connected sequencer to the VM200, the VM200 will recall Scene 07. The VM200 features two Program Change Tables (01 User Table, and 02 Preset Table). You can use the Program Change Table parameter to select Table 01 or 02. The default setting is “01.” For more information, refer to the “Program Change To Scene Memory Assignment Tables” on page 210. VM200 User’s Guide 177 VM200 & MIDI Control Change Messages You can send Control Change messages to the VM200 to control VM200 parameters in real time. (For more information, see “Using Control Change Messages” on page 184.) Inversely, when you adjust parameters on the VM200, the VM200 can transmit Control Change messages to remotely control the parameters of connected MIDI devices or instruments. Control Change TX Turn on the Control Change TX parameter if you want the VM200 to transmit Control Change messages when you adjust mix parameters. The default setting is “Off.” Control Change RX Turn on the Control Change RX parameter if you want the VM200 to adjust mix parameters when a Control Change message is received. The default setting is “Off.” Control Change Table The Control Change Tables assign Control Change numbers to various controller numbers. These assignments enable you to send MIDI messages from an external MIDI device to control VM200 parameters in real time. For example, you could assign Control Change number 5 to channel fader 5. If you then send Control Change number 5 from a connected device to the VM200, the VM200 will adjust fader 5. The VM200 features two Control Change Tables (01 User Table, and 02 Preset Table). You can use the Control Change Table parameter to select Table 01 or 02. The default setting is “01.” For more information, refer to the “Control Change To Control Parameters Assignment Tables” on page 211. 178 VM200 User’s Guide System Exclusive Messages (Fostex Exclusive) System Exclusive Messages (Fostex Exclusive) You can control VM200 parameters in real time using System Exclusive messages. For more information, see System Exclusive Parameter Control on page 188. If you want the VM200 to receive System Exclusive messages, turn on the “System Exclusive TX & RX” parameter (described below). The “DevID” (device ID) should match the number selected on the external MIDI device. System Exclusive TX & RX This parameter determines whether or not the VM200 adjusts mix parameters when System Exclusive messages are received, or whether the VM200 transmits parameter settings in response to Parameter Requests. It also determines whether the VM200 transmits System Exclusive messages on the “DevID” channel when mix parameters are adjusted, or whether the VM200 transmits Parameter Requests on the “DevID” channel. You can set this parameter to “On” or “Off.” The default setting is “Off.” System Exclusive DevID This parameter determines the ID number of the device to and from which the VM200 transmits and receives System Exclusive messages. You can set this parameter to 0 – 126. The default setting is “0.” Bulk Dump You can use the System Exclusive Bulk Dump to transfer VM200 data (such as Scene Memory, EQ Library, Effects Library, and Setup data) to another MIDI device. This is useful for backing-up VM200 data to a MIDI data filer or computer, or for exchanging data between VM200s. Note: Fostex does not guarantee compatibility of MIDI Bulk Dump messages between two VM200s with different software versions. Bulk RX The Bulk RX parameter determines whether the VM200 receives MIDI Bulk requests and MIDI Bulk Dump messages. If you turn on the Bulk RX parameter, the VM200 transmits Bulk Dump messages in response to Bulk Dump requests. Bulk Dump messages and Bulk Dump requests are not echoed. You can transmit Bulk Dump messages from the VM200 regardless of this setting. See “Bulk Dump” on page 189 for more information. VM200 UserÕs Guide 179 VM200 & MIDI Using Program Change Messages to Recall Scenes When the VM200 receives a MIDI Program Change, it can recall a scene from Scene Memory. (Which scene it recalls is determined by the Program Change Assignment Table. For more information, see page 210.) Similarly, when you recall a scene on the VM200, it can transmit a Program Change message that will recall a scene on another VM200. Alternatively, the Program Change message can be recorded to a MIDI sequencer and later used to recall a particular scene automatically. Scene Memories 0 through 99 and Preset Scenes P0, P1, and P2 are initially assigned to Program Changes 1 through 128. However, you can edit these assignments using the 3:PGM. TABLE2 function page, which you can access by pressing the [MIDI] function key. These assignments control both transmission (TX) and reception (RX). For example, when the VM200 receives Program Change 07 from an external MIDI device, it will recall Scene 07. Inversely, when Scene 07 is recalled, the VM200 will transmit Program Change 07. Follow these steps to set up the VM200 to receive and transmit MIDI Program Change messages: 1. 2. 3. Press the [MIDI] key. The VM200 displays the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page. Set the VM200 and the external MIDI device to the same MIDI channel. The external MIDI device that receives MIDI messages from the VM200 should be set to the MIDI Channel specified by the TX CH parameter. The RX CH parameter of the VM200 should be set to the same MIDI Channel as the device transmitting MIDI messages. Set the TX CH and/or RX CH parameters to ON. Use the EQ/LO and EQ/LO-MID Gain rotary controls. Refer to the illustration below. Program Change TX and RX are “ON.” 180 VM200 User’s Guide Editing the User Program Change Assign Table Editing the User Program Change Assign Table The VM200 features two Program Change Assign Tables. The first is the User Table, which appears on the 2:PGM TABLE1 function page. You can edit the assignments in this table. The second table is the Preset Table, which appears on the 3:PGM TABLE2 function page. You can view the assignments in the Preset table, but not edit them. Follow the steps below to assign a Scene Memory to a Program Change number. 1. Press the [MIDI] key twice. The VM200 displays the 2:PGM TABLE1 function page. 2. Select a Program Change number. Rotate the EQ/LO GAIN rotary control to select a number from 1 through 128. As you turn the control, the PGM CHG No. parameter changes and the Assign Table reflects the change. Select a Scene number. Rotate the EQ/LO-MID GAIN rotary control to select a scene number from P0, P1, P2, or 00 through 99. As you turn the control, the SCENE No. parameter changes, and the Assign Table scrolls to reflect the change. 3. VM200 User’s Guide 181 VM200 & MIDI Viewing the Preset Program Change Assign Table The Preset Program Change Assign Table appears on the 3:PGM TABLE2 function page. Follow these steps to view the Preset assignments: 1. Press the [MIDI] key three times. The VM200 displays the 3:PGM TABLE2 function page. 2. Select a Program Change number. Rotate the EQ/LO GAIN rotary control to select a number from 001 through 128. As you turn the control, the PGM CHG No. parameter changes, and the Assign Table scrolls to reflect the change. The Scene number assigned to the selected Program Change number will appear next to it in the Assign Table. Program Change Assign Table Notes The “Scene Memory to Program Change Assign Table” appears on page 210. To reset the assignments to their initial settings, press the [SYSTEM] key six times or until it displays the 6:INITIALIZE function page. Turn the EQ/LO GAIN rotary control to set the INIT ITEM parameter to “PGM TBL,” and press the [ENTER] key. For more information, see “Initializing the VM200” on page 197. You can store the Program Change Assign Table to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, using MIDI Bulk Dump. (See “Bulk Dump” on page 179 for more information.) If a scene is assigned to two or more program changes, the lowest program change is transmitted when the scene is recalled. 182 VM200 User’s Guide Examples: Using Program Change Messages Examples: Using Program Change Messages The following figures illustrate typical ways in which to utilize MIDI Program Change messages with the VM200. In the following example, if you are using the Preset Program Change Table (which appears on function page 3:PGM TABLE2), when you send Program Change 10 from the MIDI keyboard, the VM200 will recall Scene 10, due to preset assignment. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI keyboard In the following example, Program Change 33 has been programmed into a song on the MIDI sequencer and will be transmitted to the VM200 at the specified point when the song is played. If you are using the Preset Program Change Table (2), the VM200 will recall Scene 33, due to preset assignment. Since the VM200 outputs Program Change messages when scenes are recalled, you can record “scene recalls” to the MIDI sequencer in real time. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI sequencer You can also connect two VM200s via MIDI and recall a scene on the first VM200, so that the corresponding Program Change message will be transmitted to the second VM200 recall the assigned scene. VM200 User’s Guide 183 VM200 & MIDI Using Control Change Messages When the VM200 receives a MIDI Control Change message, it can adjust a mix parameter specified by the Control Change Assign Table. (For more information, see page 211.) Similarly, when a mix parameter is adjusted on the VM200, the VM200 can transmit a Control Change message to control another VM200. Alternatively, you can record Control Change messages to a MIDI sequencer and use them later to automate parameter control. You can assign up to 114 mix parameters to Control Changes 0 through 95 and 102 through 119. (Due to the MIDI standard, Control Changes 96 through 101 are unavailable.) The VM200 “Control Change To Control Parameters Assignment Tables” on page 211 lists initial assignments. You can edit these assignments using the 4:CTL TABLE1 function page. Follow these steps to set up the VM200 to receive and transmit MIDI Control Change messages: 1. 2. 3. 184 Press the [MIDI] key. The VM200 displays the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page. Set the VM200 and the external MIDI device to the same MIDI channel. The external MIDI device that receives MIDI messages from the VM200 should be set to the MIDI Channel specified by the TX CH parameter. The RX CH parameter of the VM200 should be set to the same MIDI Channel as the device transmitting MIDI messages. Set the TX CH and/or RX CH parameters to ON. Use the EQ/LO and EQ/LO-MID GAIN rotary controls. Refer to the illustration below. VM200 User’s Guide Editing the Control Change Assign Table Editing the Control Change Assign Table The VM200 features two Control Change Assign Tables. The first is the User Table, which appears on the 4:CTL TABLE1 function page. You can edit the assignments in this table. The second table is the Preset Table, which appears on the 5:CTL TABLE2 function page. You can view the assignments in the Preset table, but not edit them. Follow the steps below to assign a control parameter to a Control Change number. 1. Press the [MIDI] key four times. The VM200 displays the 4:CTL TABLE1 function page. The following page appears on the display. 2. Select a Control Change number. Rotate the EQ/LO GAIN rotary control to select a Control Change number from 0 through 95 or 102 through 119. (Numbers 096 through 101 are unavailable). Select the section of the VM200 you wish to control with the Control Change number. Rotate the EQ/LO-MID GAIN rotary control to select the section you wish to control with the selected Control Change number. Options include NON, CHANNEL, MASTER, EFFECT, and SCENE ST. Select the sub-section of the VM200 you wish to control. Rotate the EQ/HI-MID GAIN rotary control to select a sub-section. Options include CH1–20, ST BUSS, REC BUSS, AUX1–4, EFF1–2, MODE, PST/PRE, and AUX PAIR. The available options vary depending on your previous selections. Select a parameter item you wish to control with the selected Control Change number. Rotate the EQ/HI [GAIN] rotary control to select a parameter item. The available options vary depending on your previous selections. For more information, refer to the “Control Change To Control Parameters Assignment Tables” on page 211. 3. 4. 5. VM200 UserÕs Guide 185 VM200 & MIDI Viewing the Preset Control Change Assign Table The Preset Control Change Assign Table appears on the 5:CTL TABLE2 function page. Follow these steps to view the Preset assignments: 1. Press the [MIDI] key five times. The VM200 displays the 5:CTL TABLE2 function page. 2. Select a Control Change number. Rotate the EQ/LO GAIN rotary control to select from 0 through 95 or 102–119. As you turn the control, the CTL CHG No. parameter changes, and the Assign Table scrolls to reflect the change. The parameter item assigned to the selected Control Change number will appear next to it in the Assign Table. Control Change Assign Table Notes The“Control Change To Control Parameters Assignment Tables” on page 211. To reset the assignments to their initial settings, press the [SYSTEM] key six times or until it displays the 6:INITIALIZE function page. Turn the EQ/LO GAIN rotary control to set the INIT ITEM parameter to “CTL TBL,” and press the [ENTER] key. For more information, see “Initializing the VM200” on page 197. You can store the Control Change Assign Table to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, using MIDI Bulk Dump. (See “Bulk Dump” on page 179 for more information.) If a parameter is assigned to two or more control changes, the lowest control change is transmitted when the parameter is recalled. 186 VM200 User’s Guide Examples: Using Control Change Messages Examples: Using Control Change Messages The following figures illustrate typical ways in which to utilize MIDI Control Change messages with the VM200. The following example assumes you are using the Preset Control Change Table (which appears on function page 5:CTL TABLE2) and that an assignable MIDI controller on the MIDI keyboard has been assigned Control Change 83. When you adjust the controller, Control Change 83 will be transmitted to the VM200, which will then adjust the effect send 2 level for input channel 2. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI keyboard In the following example, input channel 5 fader movements are recorded in real time to a MIDI sequencer using Control Change 5. During playback, the sequencer transmits Control Change 5 back to the VM200 and fader 5 moves accordingly, due to preset assignment. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI sequencer You can also connect two VM200s via MIDI to enable you to control the second VM200 from the first. For example, you could move the Master Fader on the first VM200, causing the second VM200 to operate its Master Fader as well. VM200 UserÕs Guide 187 VM200 & MIDI Controlling Parameters Using Fostex Exclusive Messages You can also control VM200 parameters in real time using MIDI System Exclusive messages. When you adjust a mix parameter, the VM200 transmits a System Exclusive Parameter Change message. To transmit and receive System Exclusive messages on the VM200, set the SYSTEM EX. TX&RX parameter on the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page to “On” and set the DevID (Device ID) parameter to match the device ID assigned to the external MIDI device. Data formats for Fostex Exclusive messages are provided in the Appendix. System Exclusive TX&RX 188 Device ID VM200 User’s Guide Bulk Dump Bulk Dump The VM200 can transfer Setup data, Scene Memories, Effect and EQ Libraries, and Program and Control Change Assign Tables to another MIDI device using the System Exclusive Bulk Dump function. This function enables you to back up important VM200 data to a MIDI data filer or computer, or to transfer data between multiple VM200s. The VM200 can also receive Bulk Dump requests from other MIDI devices. Transmitting MIDI Bulk Dump Messages The VM200 transmits Bulk Dump data on the transmission channel you specify using the TX CH parameter on the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page. To execute a Bulk Dump operation, you specify the data you wish to transfer using the parameters on the 6:BULK DUMP function page, then press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 can also transmit data automatically when it receives MIDI Bulk Dump Request. The BLOCK parameter on the 6:BULK DUMP function page enables you to specify the block of data you wish to send. Follow these steps to execute a Bulk Dump. Automatic transmission in response to Bulk Dump Request If you set the BLK DMP REQ. parameter on the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page to RX ON, the VM200 will be able to receive a MIDI Bulk Dump request message from an external MIDI device. 1. Press the [MIDI] key. The VM200 displays the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page. Bulk Dump Request RX parameter 2. VM200 UserÕs Guide Rotate the EQ/HI GAIN rotary control to set the BLK DMP REQ parameter to “RX ON.” The default setting of the Bulk Dump Request parameter is “RX ON.” The VM200 will transmit Bulk Dump data on the specified MIDI transmit channel when it receives Bulk Dump Request from the connected MIDI device. To specify which data you wish to transmit, see “Specifying the data you want to transfer” on page 190. 189 VM200 & MIDI Manual transmission of Bulk Dump Messages 1. Press the [MIDI] key six times (from start of cycle). The VM200 displays the 6:BULK DUMP function page. 2. Press the [ENTER] key. The VM200 starts transmitting Bulk Dump Data to the connected MIDI device and displays the following message: “WARNING! Transmit Bulk Dump Data Now...” Warning: Do not power off the VM200 while it is transmitting data or you may damage the system or the connected MIDI device. Specifying the data you want to transfer 1. Press the [MIDI] key six times (from start of cycle). The VM200 displays the 6: BULK DUMP function page. 2. Rotate the EQ/LO GAIN rotary control to adjust the Item parameter. This parameter specifies the data you want the VM200 to transfer. Rotate the EQ/LO-MID GAIN rotary control to adjust the Block parameter. This parameter specifies the block of data you want the VM200 to transfer. The Block parameter is available only if you select SETUP, SCENE, EFF LIB, or EQ LIB for the Item parameter. Rotate the EQ/HI-MID GAIN rotary control to adjust the Interval parameter. The Interval parameter specifies the interval between data blocks during Bulk Dump transmission. 3. 4. Item 190 Contents Block ALL (default) All items listed in this table N/A SETUP VM200 all current setup data ALL, SYSTEM, MIDI, LOC MEM SCENE Scene memories ALL, CURRENT, 00–99 EFF LIB Effect library user programs ALL, 50–99 VM200 User’s Guide Receiving Bulk Dump Requests Item 5. Contents Block EQ LIB EQ library user programs ALL, 50–99 PGM TBL1 Program Change Assign Table 1 (user-definable table) N/A CTL TBL1 Control Change Assign Table 1 (user-definable table) N/A If you send too much data at once, you may overload MIDI devices that have small data buffers. Setting a longer interval will allow slower devices to process received MIDI data. You can use an interval setting of 0 when you Bulk Dump between multiple VM200s. You can set the interval from 0–500 in 10ms increments. Press the [ENTER] key to send the specified Bulk Dump data immediately, or press the [EXIT] key to return to the previous screen. Receiving Bulk Dump Requests If the receive channel (RX CH parameter on the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page) and the DevID (device ID number) parameter on the VM200 match those of the sending device, the sending device will transmit the specified Bulk Dump data to the VM200. VM200 UserÕs Guide 191 VM200 & MIDI MMC (MIDI Machine Control) Send MMC is an abbreviation for MIDI Machine Control. You can control MMC-compatible recorders from the VM200 by sending MIDI Machine Control (MMC) commands. In MMC Send mode, the VM200’s [ON] keys 1 through 8 function as the transport keys, store, recall keys for locate memories. You can use the [EQ EDIT] keys and [SOLO] keys to locate sixteen definable locate points (LOCATE 1–16). While you hold down the [ENTER] key, the [SOLO] keys function as the record track select keys. MMC commands are transmitted via MIDI. The following example illustrates remote control of an MMC-compatible digital MTR (such as the Fostex VR800) from the VM200 using MMC commands. ADAT IN ADAT OUT ADAT IN ADAT OUT OPTICAL ACCESS OL 0 6 12 24 1 MIDI Machine Control Data 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A SYNC RECORD TRACK 6 1 2 3 4 5 START IN OUT END IN OUT STORE EDIT UNDO / REDO DISP SEL SETUP AUTO RTN PREVIEW HOLD/ MIDI IN 7 8 CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH EXIT / NO EXECUTE / YES EJECT PGM SEL AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY VARI PITCH SHIFT LOCATE P.EDIT RECORD AUTO PUNCH TIME BASE SEL SCRUB JOG SHUTTLE LOC MEM STOP PLAY REW F FWD CLIPBOARD PLAY LOCATE ABS 0 LOCATE REC END ADAT-compatible Digital multitrack recorder Setting the Device ID Number 1. 2. Press the [MIDI] key. The VM200 displays the 1:MIDI TX&RX function page. Select an ID number for the DevID parameter. Rotate the EQ/LO-MID Freq rotary control to specify the device ID number of the connected digital MTR. Select a number from 000 to 126. Entering MMC Send Mode 3. 192 Press the [ROUTING/PHASE] key and the [PAIR/GROUP] key simultaneously to enter MMC Send mode. VM200 User’s Guide Entering MMC Send Mode The two keys flash and the VM200 displays the MMC SEND function page. Note: Press the [EXIT] key at any time to cancel MMC Send mode and return to Channel Edit mode. Refer to the table below for an explanation of the functions and controls on the MMC SEND function page. Key 4. VM200 UserÕs Guide Function MMC Command Value ON 1 Record 06 ON 2 Stop 01 ON 3 Play 02 ON 4 Rewind 05 ON 5 Fast Forward 04 ON 6 ----- ON 7 Recalls a locate memory. ON 8 Stores a locate memory. EQ EDIT 1–8 Locate points 1–8 SOLO 1–8 Locate points 9–16 ENTER + SOLO 1–8 Record track select 1–8 Press the [ON] keys 1–6 to transmit the transport commands to the MTR. To start recording on the MTR, press the channel 1 [ON] key and the channel 3 [ON] key simultaneously. 193 VM200 & MIDI MMC Send and Timecode When sending Locate Time in MMC Send mode, the VM200 refers to the frame rate set by the Frame Mode parameter found on the SETUP:SYSTEM 1: CLOCK/MON function page. Before you can correctly set a locate time on the VM200 to locate a position on a connected external digital recorder via MMC Send commands, you need to set the correct frame rate for the timecode. The VM200 supports four frame rates: 24, 25, 30D (drop-frame), and 30fps. It is important that you set the timecode frame rate to match the material recorded on the digital recorder. Otherwise, the locate point you set on the VM200 will be out of sync with the recorded material. Frame Mode Follow the steps below to set the frame rate for the MIDI timecode. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key. The system displays the SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/MON function page. FRAME MODE 2. 3. 194 Specify a value for the Frame Mode parameter by rotating the EQ/LO-MID Freq control. The Frame Mode parameter specifies the frame rate. Select a frame rate appropriate for your project. The options include 24, 25, 30DF (drop-frame), and 30ND (non-drop frame). The default setting is 24. Press the [CHANNEL/METER] key or the [EXIT] key. The VM200 returns to the previous mode. Alternatively, press the [ROUTING/PHASE] key and the [PAIR/GROUP] key simultaneously to select MMC Send mode immediately after you set the Frame Mode parameter. VM200 UserÕs Guide Storing Locate Points Storing Locate Points Follow the steps below to store a locate point to the desired Locate key. 1. While the MMC SEND function page is displayed, rotate the [GAIN] rotary controls to set the locate times in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The EQ/LO GAIN rotary control adjusts the hours (MTC-[h]). The EQ/LO-MID GAIN rotary control adjusts the minutes (MTC-[m]). The EQ/HI-MID GAIN rotary control adjusts the seconds (MTC-[s]). The EQ/HI GAIN rotary control the frames (MTC-[f]). LOCATE POINT 2. LOCATE TIME Press the channel 8 [ON] key (functioning as the STORE key), then press an [EQ EDIT] or [SOLO] key to specify where you wish to store the locate point. The VM200 displays the locate point in the upper-left of the display. Checking the Locate Points You can check the locate points memorized into the Locate keys as follows: 3. While the MMC SEND function page is displayed, press the channel 7 [ON] key (functioning as the RECALL key), then press the Locate key for the Locate point you wish to check. The VM200 displays the locate point in the upper-left of the display. Transmitting the Locate Commands 4. VM200 UserÕs Guide Press the desired [EQ EDIT] or [SOLO] keys 1–16 (functioning as Locate keys 1–16) to transmit the locate commands to the recorder. Note that you can store Locate points using the MIDI Bulk Dump function. See “Bulk Dump” on page 189. 195 VM200 & MIDI 196 VM200 User’s Guide 10 VM200 User’s Guide - C MM 3 -20 11 19 -30 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R ND -10 - 0 -20 4 12 20 -30 -40 0 +1 -10 - ON -20 5 13 0 -30 -40 0 +1 LO SO - ON -20 6 14 0 +1 LO SO -30 -40 0 PA N IT ED -10 EQ - ON IT ED -10 EQ -30 0 +1 -20 LO SO -40 0 PA N Q - ON -30 0 +1 -20 SO LO -40 0 PA N ED IT -10 EQ FR EQ - ON IT ED -10 EQ -30 -20 LO 0 +1 SO -40 0 PA N ID -M Q N GA I /LO EQ - ON IT ED -10 EQ -40 0 +1 -30 LO SO -60 0 PA N EQ FR ED -10 ON IT 0 LO SO Q ID I-M IN GA /H EQ Initializing the VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Default Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 -20 EQ PA N PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ ON IT ED PA N Chapter Contents -40 0 SE PA I GR R/ OU P LO SO EQ FR -20 17 EQ IT ED ON LO IT SO EX Q IN GA I /H EQ This brief chapter describes how to re-initialize the VM200 to reset all parameters to their original default values. PA N TN FR EF ST L B 12 LL RE C B SO USS LO RE CA US S/S R OL O -36 -40 -18 -24 EQ LIB RA ST OR RY RE CA E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF FL IB EF F1 RA ST OR RY E EF FE DI T EF F2 N R MI MI XE 00 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG CHAPTER 12 Initializing the VM200 About This Chapter 197 MA X Initializing the VM200 Initializing the VM200 You can initialize the VM200 to its factory default settings by using the Initialization function. You can specify the items you wish to initialize, choosing from the following options: ❑ ALL (all parameters) ❑ SCENE MEM. (Scene Memory) ❑ EQ LIBRARY ❑ EFF LIBRARY ❑ PGM C. TABLE (Program Change Table) ❑ CTRL C. TABLE (Control Change Table) ❑ SETUP Note: If you want to reset only the mix settings and retain other parameter settings, recall one of the preset scene memories P0, P1, or P2 instead. See the chapter entitled “Scene Memory” on page 147 for more information. Follow the steps below to initialize the VM200. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] key repeatedly to display the 6: INITIALIZE function page. 2. Rotate the EQ/LO Gain control to select the desired item. Select from the following options: • ALL (all parameters) • SCENE MEM. (Scene Memory) • EQ LIBRARY • EFF LIBRARY • PGM C. TABLE (Program Change Table) • CTRL C. TABLE (Control Change Table) • SETUP The selected item flashes. 198 VM200 User’s Guide Initializing the VM200 3. Press the [ENTER] key. The selected item lights up continuously, and a “YES/ENTER” dialog appears. 4. Press the [ENTER] key to initialize the specified settings, or press the [EXIT] key to return to the previous screen. If you press the [ENTER] key, a warning message appears and the VM200 starts initializing its settings. Warning: Do not power off the VM200 while it is writing to the flash memory or you may damage the VM200. VM200 User’s Guide 199 Initializing the VM200 Default Setup Parameters System Parameters Value CLOCK SEL INT44 MON SEL ST-B SOLO MODE PFL SOLO KEY LATCH CASCADE OFF MOTOR ON FRAME MODE 24 RECALL SAFE CH. FADER OFF CH. PAN OFF CH. ON OFF ROUTING OFF AUX1–4 OFF EFF1/2 OFF EQ OFF EQ ON OFF Ch1–20 ALL OFF SOLO SAFE Ch1–20 ALL OFF POWER ON RCL LAST-STORED MIDI Parameters 200 Value Tx CH 1 Rx CH OMNI ECHO OFF BULK Rx ON PG Tx ON PG Rx ON PG Table 1 (User) CC Tx OFF CC Rx OFF CC Table 1 (User) SySEx Tx&Rx OFF SysEx DevID 0 PGM C. TABLE1 Same as PGM C. TABLE 2(preset) CTL C. TABLE1 Same as CTL C. TABLE2 (preset) ITEM ALL BLOCK --- INTERVAL 0ms VM200 User’s Guide X R MA RA RY ST OR E EF FE DI T EF F2 VM 2 DI GI TA LR EC OR DI NG Specifications and Data RE CA RE C B SO USS LO LL RE CA US S/S R OL O ST L B -36 -40 -18 -24 12 EQ LIB RA RY ST OR E SE LE CT ED EQ EQ ON LL RE CA LL EF F1 EF FL IB 00 MI XE N MI APPENDIX LO Chapter Contents IT ON LO ON LO -10 0 -20 0 +1 -30 0 LO SO ON IT -40 - -60 - 6 14 -30 -40 - 5 13 -40 3 -40 -30 0 11 19 -20 0 +1 CH A ME NNE TE L/ R 10 - MM C SE ND -10 - PA I GR R/ OU P 0 +1 -30 0 -20 4 12 20 -10 - -40 -30 ON 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 EQ -10 ED IT ON 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 EQ -10 ED ON -40 -30 0 +1 SO 0 LO -20 -10 - ON -40 0 +1 -30 0 SO LO -20 EQ -10 ED PA N ED IT PA N EQ IT PA N -40 -10 EQ Q FR EQ Q PA N - 0 +1 ED ON IT PA N ID -M N GA I /LO EQ 202 203 205 206 206 207 208 208 209 210 210 210 211 211 212 213 216 225 226 226 -30 0 LO SO FR EQ EQ -20 ED ON IT PA N SO Q IN PA GE 9-1 SE 6A LE CT DA TI N EQ GA /H I-M ID EQ ED IT PA N SO FR 17 EQ -20 EF EQ FR ED IT PA N TN EX Q IN GA EQ /H I SO Display Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tables & Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Fader Gain Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Fader Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pan Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q......................................... EQ Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Change To Scene Memory Assignment Tables . . . Program Change Assign Table 1 (User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Change Assign Table 2 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Change To Control Parameters Assignment Tables Control Change Assign Table 1 (User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Change Assign Table 2 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Scene Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI In/Out Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Declaration of EC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fostex Distributors List In Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM200 User’s Guide 201 Display Warning Messages Warning Messages Meaning EQ 1–8 Invalid! (EQ Enable 9–16) The EQ ENABLE setting of the channel you are operating is not turned ON, thus the EQ is not available for that channel. The EQ ENABLE setting of the channel you are operating is EQ 9–16 Invalid! (EQ Enable 1–8) not turned ON, thus the EQ is not available for that channel. You have tried to operate channels 21–24, which are not Channel Invalid! available. ADD AUX parameter is turned off, and AUX3/4 are not availAUX 3/4 Invalid! (ADD.AUX Off) able. REC BUSS Invalid! (AD.AUX On) ADD AUX parameter is turned on, and REC BUSS is not available. EFF 1/2 Invalid! (EQ Enable EQ is enabled for channels 1–16, and effects are not avail1–16) able. The phantom power is turned on. (This appears when powering up the mixer.) The byte count of the received Bulk Dump data is not corByte Count Error in BULK DATA! rect. Check Sum Error in BULK DATA! The check sum of the received Bulk Dump data is not correct. MIDI IN Buffer Full! The VM200 has received too much MIDI data. +48V SW On! MIDI OUT Buffer Full! The VM200 has transmitted too much MIDI data. Wrong WORD-IN CLK The word clock received from the connected device is not correct and the VM200 cannot synchronize correctly. Digital signals from the ADAT IN connector are not word clock synchronized with the VM200, and noise may infiltrate the audio data. Digital signals from the S/P DIF-IN connector are not word clock synchronized with the VM200, and noise may infiltrate the audio data. Wrong ADAT-IN CLK! Wrong S/P DIF-IN CLK! 202 VM200 User’s Guide Specifications Specifications Inputs ANALOG IN (ch1-ch4) ANALOG IN (ch5-ch8) INSERT IN (ch1-ch4) ADAT IN EFFECT RTN1 (ch17–ch20) S/P DIF IN2 2TRACK IN WORD IN Connector A/B switch Input impedance PAD switch PHANTOM switch Connector Input impedance Nominal input level Connector Input impedance Nominal input level Connector Format XLR3-31 (1: Ground, 2: Hot, 3: Cold), 1/4-inch phone jack A: XLR3-31 (mics), B: 1/4-inch phone jack (lines) 3kΩ or higher (mics), 10kΩ or higher (lines) 26dB (+2dB, –1dB) +48V (+1V, –2V) 1/4-inch phone jack 10kΩ or higher –10dBV 1/4-inch phone jack 10kΩ or higher –10dBV Optical (Toslink) Adat format Connector none Connector Format Connector Input impedance Nominal input level Connector Level Optical (Toslink) IEC60958 (S/P DIF) RCA pin jack (x2) 10kΩ or higher –10dBV BNC TTL/75Ω (with Terminate ON/OFF switch) 1. Effect returns for the internal effects processor 2. Assignable to any consecutive odd/even channels Outputs Connector Applicable impedance Nominal output level Connector REC BUSS Input impedance OUT1 (1,2) Nominal input level Connector STEREO OUT Input impedance (L, R) Nominal input level Connector S/P DIF OUT Format Connector ADAT OUT Format Connector MON OUT (L, R) Applicable impedance Nominal output level Connector PHONES Input impedance Max. output level Connector WORD OUT Level AUX OUT (1, 2) VM200 User’s Guide 1/4-inch phone jack (x2) 10kΩ or higher –10dBV 1/4-inch phone jack (x2) 10kΩ or higher –10dBV 1/4-inch phone jack (x2) 10kΩ or higher –10dBV Optical (Toslink) IEC60958 (S/P DIF) Optical (Toslink) Adat format RCA pin jack (x2) 10kΩ or higher –10dBV 1/4-inch phone jack (x1) 8kΩ or higher 50mW or higher (at 32Ω) BNC TTL/75Ω 203 MIDI IN/OUT/THRU Connector Format DIN 5-pin (x3) MIDI standards 1. The default setting is REC BUSS. However, with the ADD.AUX parameter turned on, AUX3/4 are available, and these connectors function as AUX OUT 3/4, providing four AUX SENDs. General Frequency response Dynamic range 20Hz–20kHz, +1dB/-3dB (phones: 50Hz–20kHz, +1dB/-3dB) 90dB or higher (LINE IN CH IN –> ST OUT) CH IN–>ST OUT: 0.08% or less (at 0dBV output) Total harmonic LINE IN–>ST OUT: 0.008% or less (at 0dBV output) distortion LINE IN–>PHONES OUT: 0.05% or less (at 50mW/33) AUX1-4, ST BUSS OUT: -90dB or less (master fader = min, all ch faders = min) AUX1-4, ST OUT: -78dB or less (master fader = 0dB, all ch faders = 0dB) MIC->INSERT: –71dBV or less (gain=max, pad=off, Rs=150) Residual noise MONITOR OUT (min): –100dBV or less PHONES (min): -98dBV or less S/N 1–4CH CH IN (–4dB)–>AUX1-4, ST BUSS OUT: 92dB or higher (IHF-A) CH IN (–48dB)–>AUX1-4, ST BUSS OUT: 76dB or higher (IHF-A) 5–8CH CH IN (–4dB)–>AUX1-4, ST BUSS OUT: 92dB or higher (IHF-A) CH IN (–38dB)–>AUX1-4, ST BUSS OUT: 82dB or higher (IHF-A) 1–4CH: 50dB (+3dB -1dB) Mic gain 5–8CH: 40dB (+3dB -1dB) Crosstalk 70dB or higher (@ 1kHz), phone: 53dB or higher PHONES max 50mW or higher, impedance 32Ω, 1kHz output A/D 20bit, 64-times oversampling ∆∑ modulation D/A 20bit, 128-times oversampling ∆∑ modulation Fader Motor-driven, 128 steps/60mm Internal: 44.1kHz fixed Sampling frequency External (S/PDIF, ADAT, WORD): 44.1kHz/48kHz+/–6% Internal processing 32-bit Equalizer 4-band parametric (LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, HI) Type: Peaking (bell) or Lo shelving or High Pass Filter f: 20.3Hz–4.00kHz (1/24 octave/step) EQ LO Gain: +/–18dB (0.5dB step) Q: 0.1–20 (45 steps) Type: Peaking (bell) f: 20.3Hz–4.00kHz (1/24 octave steps) EQ LO-MID Gain: +/–18dB (0.5dB step) Q: 0.1–20 (45 steps) Type: Peaking (bell) f: 500Hz–20.2kHz (1/24 octave steps) EQ HI-MID Gain: +/–18dB (0.5dB step) Q: 0.1–20 (45 steps) Type: Peaking (bell) or Lo shelving or High Pass Filter f: 500Hz–20.2kHz (1/24 octave steps) EQ HI Gain: +/–18dB (0.5dB step) Q: 0.1–20 (45 steps) Scene memory: 3 (preset) + 100 (user) Memory Effect library: 50 (preset) + 50 (user) EQ library: 50 (preset) + 50 (user) Display STN graphic LCD (256 x 64 dots) 204 VM200 User’s Guide Maintenance Dimensions Weight Power source Power consumption 16 13/16(W) X 4 5/8(H) X 17 7/8(D) inches (428(W) X 118(H) X 454(D) mm) Approx. 15.4 pounds (7kg) 90V–250V (50Hz/60Hz): 120VAC 60Hz(US, Canada), 230V– 50/60Hz(Europe) 100VAC 50/60Hz(JPN) 30W ❑ Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement. ❑ “Adat” and the OPTICAL symbol are trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Maintenance For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth. For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off. Then polish the VM200 with a dry cloth. Note: Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner, or benzene, since these will damage the printing and finish of the exterior. VM200 User’s Guide 205 Tables & Data Channel Fader Gain Table No. 0 Calculated Gain (dB) Displayed Gain (dB) -∞ -∞ No. 43 Calculated Gain (dB) Displayed Gain (dB) -18.70 -18.7 Calculated Gain (dB) Displayed Gain (dB) 86 -5.90 -5.9 No. 1 -72.30 -72.0 44 -18.30 -18.3 87 -5.60 -5.6 2 -66.20 -66.0 45 -17.90 -17.9 88 -5.30 -5.3 3 -60.20 -60.0 46 -17.50 -17.5 89 -5.00 -5.0 4 -57.40 -57.5 47 -17.10 -17.1 90 -4.65 -4.7 5 -55.30 -55.0 48 -16.75 -16.8 91 -4.30 -4.3 6 -53.20 -53.0 49 -16.40 -16.4 92 -3.90 -3.9 7 -51.00 -51.0 50 -16.05 -16.1 93 -3.50 -3.5 8 -49.00 -49.0 51 -15.70 -15.7 94 -3.10 -3.1 9 -46.90 -47.0 52 -15.35 -15.4 95 -2.70 -2.7 10 -45.00 -45.0 53 -15.00 -15.0 96 -2.30 -2.3 11 -43.30 -43.5 54 -14.70 -14.7 97 -1.90 -1.9 12 -41.60 -42.0 55 -14.40 -14.4 98 -1.50 -1.5 13 -40.00 -40.0 56 -14.10 -14.1 99 -1.10 -1.1 14 -38.60 -38.5 57 -13.80 -13.8 100 -0.70 -0.7 15 -37.30 -37.0 58 -13.50 -13.5 101 -0.35 -0.4 16 -36.10 -36.0 59 -13.20 -13.2 102 0.00 0.0 17 -35.00 -35.0 60 -12.90 -12.9 103 +0.35 +0.4 18 -33.90 -34.0 61 -12.60 -12.6 104 +0.70 +0.7 19 -32.80 -33.0 62 -12.30 -12.3 105 +1.05 +1.1 20 -31.80 -32.0 63 -12.00 -12.0 106 +1.40 +1.4 21 -30.90 -31.0 64 -11.75 -11.8 107 +1.80 +1.8 22 -30.10 -30.0 65 -11.50 -11.5 108 +2.20 +2.2 23 -29.40 -29.0 66 -11.25 -11.3 109 +2.60 +2.6 24 -28.70 -28.5 67 -11.00 -11.0 110 +3.00 +3.0 25 -28.00 -28.0 68 -10.75 -10.8 111 +3.40 +3.4 26 -27.40 -27.5 69 -10.50 -10.5 112 +3.80 +3.8 27 -26.80 -27.0 70 -10.25 -10.3 113 +4.20 +4.2 28 -26.20 -26.0 71 -10.00 -10.0 114 +4.60 +4.6 29 -25.60 -25.5 72 -9.75 -9.8 115 +5.00 +5.0 30 -25.00 -25.0 73 -9.50 -9.5 116 +5.40 +5.4 31 -24.50 -24.5 74 -9.25 -9.3 117 +5.80 +5.8 32 -24.00 -24.0 75 -9.00 -9.0 118 +6.20 +6.2 33 -23.50 -23.5 76 -8.75 -8.8 119 +6.60 +6.6 34 -23.00 -23.0 77 -8.50 -8.5 120 +7.00 +7.0 35 -22.50 -22.5 78 -8.25 -8.3 121 +7.40 +7.4 36 -22.00 -22.0 79 -8.00 -8.0 122 +7.80 +7.8 37 -21.50 -21.5 80 -7.60 -7.6 123 +8.20 +8.2 38 -21.00 -21.0 81 -7.40 -7.4 124 +8.60 +8.6 39 -20.50 -20.5 82 -7.10 -7.1 125 +9.00 +9.0 40 -20.00 -20.0 83 -6.80 -6.8 126 +9.50 +9.5 41 -19.55 -19.5 84 -6.50 -6.5 127 +10.00 +10.0 42 -19.10 -19.1 85 -6.20 -6.2 206 VM200 UserÕs Guide Master Fader Gain Master Fader Gain Calculated Gain (dB) Displayed Gain (dB) Calculated Gain (dB) Displayed Gain (dB) Calculated Gain (dB) Displayed Gain (dB) 0 -∞ -∞ 1 -90.00 -90.0 43 -35.80 -35.8 44 -35.10 -35.1 86 -15.18 -15.2 87 -14.81 -14.8 2 -84.00 3 -80.00 -84.0 45 -34.40 -80.0 46 -33.70 -34.4 88 -14.44 -14.4 -33.7 89 -14.07 -14.1 4 5 -78.00 -78.0 47 -76.00 -76.0 48 -33.00 -33.0 90 -13.70 -13.7 -32.40 -32.4 91 -13.33 -13.3 6 -74.00 -74.0 7 -72.00 -72.0 49 -31.80 -31.8 92 -12.96 -13.0 50 -31.20 -31.2 93 -12.59 -12.6 8 -70.00 9 -68.70 -70.0 51 -30.60 -30.6 94 -12.22 -12.2 -68.7 52 -30.00 -30.0 95 -11.85 -11.9 10 11 -67.40 -67.4 53 -29.50 -29.5 96 -11.48 -11.5 -66.20 -66.2 54 -29.00 -29.0 97 -11.11 -11.1 12 -64.30 -64.3 55 -28.50 -28.5 98 -10.74 -10.7 13 -62.70 -62.7 56 -28.00 -28.0 99 -10.37 -10.4 14 -61.40 -61.4 57 -27.50 -27.5 100 -10.00 -10.0 15 -59.90 -60.0 58 -27.00 -27.0 101 -9.62 -9.6 16 -58.50 -58.5 59 -26.50 -26.5 102 -9.25 -9.3 17 -57.20 -57.2 60 -26.00 -26.0 103 -8.88 -8.9 18 -56.00 -56.0 61 -25.50 -25.5 104 -8.51 -8.5 19 -54.70 -54.7 62 -25.00 -25.0 105 -8.14 -8.1 20 -53.50 -53.5 63 -24.50 -24.5 106 -7.77 -7.8 21 -52.40 -52.4 64 -24.00 -24.0 107 -7.40 -7.4 22 -51.10 -51.2 65 -23.50 -23.5 108 -7.03 -7.0 23 -50.00 -50.0 66 -23.05 -23.1 109 -3.66 -3.7 24 -49.20 -49.2 67 -22.60 -22.6 110 -6.29 -6.3 25 -48.40 -48.4 68 -22.15 -22.2 111 -5.92 -5.9 26 -47.70 -47.7 69 -21.70 -21.7 112 -5.55 -5.6 27 -47.00 -47.0 70 -21.25 -21.3 113 -5.18 -5.2 28 -46.30 -46.3 71 -20.80 -20.8 114 -4.81 -4.8 29 -45.60 -45.6 72 -20.40 -20.4 115 -4.44 -4.4 30 -44.90 -44.9 73 -20.00 -20.0 116 -4.07 -4.1 31 -44.20 -44.2 74 -19.62 -19.6 117 -3.70 -3.7 32 -43.50 -43.5 75 -19.25 -19.3 118 -3.33 -3.3 33 -42.80 -42.8 76 -18.88 -18.9 119 -2.96 -3.0 34 -42.10 -42.1 77 -18.51 -18.5 120 -2.59 -2.6 35 -41.40 -41.4 78 -18.14 -18.1 121 -2.22 -2.2 36 -40.70 -40.7 79 -17.77 -17.8 122 -1.85 -1.9 37 -40.00 -40.0 80 -17.40 -17.4 123 -1.48 -1.5 38 -39.30 -39.3 81 -17.03 -17.0 124 -1.11 -1.1 39 -38.60 -38.6 82 -16.66 -16.7 125 -0.74 -0.7 40 -37.90 -37.9 83 -16.29 -16.3 126 -0.37 -0.4 41 -37.20 -37.2 84 -15.92 -15.9 127 0.00 0.0 42 -36.50 -36.5 85 -15.55 -15.6 No. VM200 User’s Guide No. No. 207 Pan Gain No. 0 Gain Left (dB) Gain Right (dB) -∞ 0.0 Displayed Pan No. <–L 14 Gain Left (dB) -1.8 Gain Right (dB) -7.1 Displayed No. Pan L3.0 28 Gain Left (dB) -9.0 Gain Right (dB) -1.4 Displayed Pan R4.0 1 -0.1 -32.0 L9.5 15 -2.0 -6.3 L2.5 29 -10.2 -1.2 R4.5 2 -0.2 -27.0 L9.0 16 -2.2 -5.5 L2.0 30 -11.6 -1.0 R5.0 3 -0.25 -23.5 L8.5 17 -2.4 -4.8 L1.5 31 -13.2 -0.8 R5.5 4 -0.3 -21.0 L8.0 18 -2.6 -4.2 L1.0 32 -15.0 -0.6 R6.0 5 -0.35 -19.0 L7.5 19 -2.8 -3.6 L0.5 33 -16.1 -0.5 R6.5 6 -0.4 -17.4 L7.0 20 -3.0 -3.0 CENTER 34 -17.4 -0.4 R7.0 7 -0.5 -16.1 L6.5 21 -3.6 -2.8 R0.5 35 -19.0 -0.35 R7.5 8 -0.6 -15.0 L6.0 22 -4.2 -2.6 R1.0 36 -21.0 -0.3 R8.0 9 -0.8 -13.2 L5.5 23 -4.8 -2.4 R1.5 37 -23.5 -0.25 R8.5 10 -1.0 -11.6 L5.0 24 -5.5 -2.2 R2.0 38 -27.0 -0.2 R9.0 11 -1.2 -10.2 L4.5 25 -6.3 -2.0 R2.5 39 -32.0 -0.1 R9.5 12 -1.4 -9.0 L4.0 26 -7.1 -1.8 R3.0 40 -∞ 0.0 R–> 13 -1.6 -8.0 L3.5 27 -8.0 -1.6 R3.5 Q HI: 0.1–20 (45 steps), HI-shelving, LPF HI-MID, LO-MID: 0.1–20 (45 steps) LO: 0.1–20 (45 steps), LO-shelving, HPF No. 0 Q Q No. Q No. 0.10 15 0.56 30 3.2 1 0.11 16 0.63 31 3.5 2 0.13 17 0.71 32 4.0 3 0.14 18 0.79 33 4.5 4 0.16 19 0.89 34 5.0 5 0.18 20 1.0 35 5.6 6 0.20 21 1.1 36 6.3 7 0.22 22 1.3 37 7.1 8 0.25 23 1.4 38 7.9 9 0.28 24 1.6 39 8.9 10 0.32 25 1.8 40 10 11 0.35 26 2.0 41 11 12 0.40 27 2.2 42 13 13 0.45 28 2.5 43 16 14 0.50 29 2.8 44 20 208 VM200 UserÕs Guide EQ Frequency EQ Frequency Range: 20.3Hz – 20.2kHz (240 steps per 1/24 octave) No. Freq (display) No. Freq (display) No. Freq (display) No. Freq (display) No. Freq (display) No. Freq (display) 0 20.3 40 64.3 80 204 120 648 160 2.06K 200 6.54K 1 20.9 41 66.2 81 210 121 667 161 2.12K 201 6.73K 2 21.5 42 68.2 82 216 122 687 162 2.18K 202 6.92K 3 22.1 43 70.2 83 223 123 707 163 2.24K 203 7.13K 4 22.7 44 72.2 84 229 124 728 164 2.31K 204 7.34K 5 23.4 45 74.3 85 236 125 749 165 2.38K 205 7.55K 6 24.1 46 76.5 86 243 126 771 166 2.45K 206 7.77K 7 24.8 47 78.7 87 250 127 794 167 2.52K 207 8.00K 8 25.5 48 81.1 88 257 128 817 168 2.59K 208 8.23K 9 26.3 49 83.4 89 265 129 841 169 2.67K 209 8.48K 10 27.0 50 85.9 90 273 130 866 170 2.75K 210 8.72K 11 27.8 51 88.4 91 281 131 891 171 2.83K 211 8.98K 12 28.7 52 91.0 92 289 132 917 172 2.91K 212 9.42K 13 29.5 53 93.6 93 297 133 944 173 3.00K 213 9.51K 14 30.4 54 96.4 94 306 134 972 174 3.08K 214 9.79K 15 31.3 55 99.2 95 315 135 1.00K 175 3.17K 215 10.1K 16 32.2 56 102 96 324 136 1.03K 176 3.27K 216 10.4K 17 33.1 57 105 97 334 137 1.06K 177 3.36K 217 10.7K 18 34.1 58 108 98 343 138 1.09K 178 3.46K 218 11.0K 19 35.1 59 111 99 354 139 1.12K 179 3.56K 219 11.3K 20 36.1 60 115 100 364 140 1.16K 180 3.67K 220 11.6K 21 37.2 61 118 101 375 141 1.19K 181 3.78K 221 12.0K 22 38.3 62 121 102 386 142 1.22K 182 3.89K 222 12.3K 23 39.4 63 125 103 397 143 1.26K 183 4.00K 223 12.7K 24 40.5 64 129 104 408 144 1.30K 184 4.12K 224 13.1K 25 41.7 65 132 105 420 145 1.33K 185 4.24K 225 13.5K 26 42.9 66 136 106 433 146 1.37K 186 4.36K 226 13.8K 27 44.2 67 140 107 445 147 1.41K 187 4.49K 227 14.3K 28 45.5 68 144 108 459 148 1.46K 188 4.62K 228 14.7K 29 46.8 69 149 109 472 149 1.50K 189 4.76K 229 15.1K 30 48.2 70 153 110 486 150 1.54K 190 4.90K 230 15.5K 31 49.6 71 157 111 500 151 1.59K 191 5.04K 231 16.0K 32 51.1 72 162 112 515 152 1.63K 192 5.19K 232 16.5K 33 52.6 73 167 113 530 153 1.68K 193 5.34K 233 17.0K 34 54.1 74 172 114 545 154 1.73K 194 5.50K 234 17.4K 35 55.7 75 177 115 561 155 1.78K 195 5.66K 235 18.0K 36 57.3 76 182 116 578 156 1.83K 196 5.82K 236 18.5K 37 59.0 77 187 117 595 157 1.89K 197 5.99K 237 19.0K 38 60.7 78 193 118 612 158 1.94K 198 6.17K 238 19.6K 39 62.5 79 198 119 630 159 2.00K 199 6.35K 239 20.2K VM200 UserÕs Guide 209 Program Change To Scene Memory Assignment Tables Program Change Assign Table 1 (User) PGM CHG # Scene PGM CHG # Scene PGM CHG # Scene Program Change Assign Table 2 (Preset) PGM CHG # Scene PGM CHG # Scene PGM CHG # Scene 1 44 87 1 00 44 43 87 86 2 45 88 2 01 45 44 88 87 3 46 89 3 02 46 45 89 88 4 47 90 4 03 47 46 90 89 5 48 91 5 04 48 47 91 90 6 49 92 6 05 49 48 92 91 7 50 93 7 06 50 49 93 92 8 51 94 8 07 51 50 94 93 9 52 95 9 08 52 51 95 94 10 53 96 10 09 53 52 96 95 11 54 97 11 10 54 53 97 96 12 55 98 12 11 55 54 98 97 13 56 99 13 12 56 55 99 98 14 57 100 14 13 57 56 100 99 15 58 101 15 14 58 57 101 P0 16 59 102 16 15 59 58 102 P1 17 60 103 17 16 60 59 103 P2 18 61 104 18 17 61 60 104 P0 19 62 105 19 18 62 61 105 P0 20 63 106 20 19 63 62 106 P0 21 64 107 21 20 64 63 107 P0 22 65 108 22 21 65 64 108 P0 23 66 109 23 22 66 65 109 P0 24 67 110 24 23 67 66 110 P0 25 68 111 25 24 68 67 111 P0 26 69 112 26 25 69 68 112 P0 27 70 113 27 26 70 69 113 P0 28 71 114 28 27 71 70 114 P0 29 72 115 29 28 72 71 115 P0 30 73 116 30 29 73 72 116 P0 31 74 117 31 30 74 73 117 P0 32 75 118 32 31 75 74 118 P0 33 76 119 33 32 76 75 119 P0 34 77 120 34 33 77 76 120 P0 35 78 121 35 34 78 77 121 P0 36 79 122 36 35 79 78 122 P0 37 80 123 37 36 80 79 123 P0 38 81 124 38 37 81 80 124 P0 39 82 125 39 38 82 81 125 P0 40 83 126 40 39 83 82 126 P0 41 84 127 41 40 84 83 127 P0 128 42 41 85 84 128 P0 43 42 86 85 42 85 43 86 210 VM200 User’s Guide Control Change To Control Parameters Assignment Tables Control Change To Control Parameters Assignment Tables Control Change Assign Table 1 (User) CTL CHG Section 1 Section 2 # Item CTL CHG Section 1 Section 2 # Item CTL CHG Section 1 Section 2 # 0 40 80 1 41 81 2 42 82 3 43 83 4 44 84 5 45 85 6 46 86 7 47 87 8 48 88 9 49 89 10 50 90 11 51 91 12 52 92 13 53 93 14 54 94 15 55 95 16 56 96 17 57 97 18 58 98 19 59 99 20 60 100 21 61 101 22 62 102 23 63 103 24 64 104 25 65 105 26 66 106 27 67 107 28 68 108 29 69 109 30 70 110 31 71 111 32 72 112 33 73 113 34 74 114 35 75 115 36 76 116 37 77 117 38 78 118 39 79 119 VM200 User’s Guide Item 211 Control Change Assign Table 2 (Preset) CTL CHG Section 1 # Section 2 Item CTL CHG Section 1 Section 2 # Item CTL CHG Section 1 # Section 2 80 Channel 19 Item 0 No Assign ---- ---- 40 Channel 19 1 Channel 1 FADER 41 Channel 20 CH ON 81 Channel 20 EFF1 SND 2 Channel 2 FADER 42 Channel 1 PAN 82 Channel 1 EFF2 SND 3 Channel 3 FADER 43 Channel 2 PAN 83 Channel 2 EFF2 SND 4 Channel 4 FADER 44 Channel 3 PAN 84 Channel 3 EFF2 SND 5 Channel 5 FADER 45 Channel 4 PAN 85 Channel 4 EFF2 SND 6 Channel 6 FADER 46 Channel 5 PAN 86 Channel 5 EFF2 SND CH ON EFF1 SND 7 Channel 7 FADER 47 Channel 6 PAN 87 Channel 6 EFF2 SND 8 Channel 8 FADER 48 Channel 7 PAN 88 Channel 7 EFF2 SND 9 Channel 9 FADER 49 Channel 8 PAN 89 Channel 8 EFF2 SND 10 Channel 10 FADER 50 Channel 9 PAN 90 Channel 9 EFF2 SND 11 Channel 11 FADER 51 Channel 10 PAN 91 Channel 10 EFF2 SND 12 Channel 12 FADER 52 Channel 11 PAN 92 Channel 11 EFF2 SND 13 Channel 13 FADER 53 Channel 12 PAN 93 Channel 12 EFF2 SND 14 Channel 14 FADER 54 Channel 13 PAN 94 Channel 13 EFF2 SND Channel 14 EFF2 SND 15 Channel 15 FADER 55 Channel 14 PAN 95 16 Channel 16 FADER 56 Channel 15 PAN 96 17 Channel 17 FADER 57 Channel 16 PAN 97 18 Channel 18 FADER 58 Channel 17 PAN 98 19 Channel 19 FADER 59 Channel 18 PAN 99 20 Channel 20 FADER 60 Channel 19 PAN 100 21 Channel 1 CH ON 61 Channel 20 22 Channel 2 CH ON 62 Channel 1 23 Channel 3 CH ON 63 Channel 2 24 Channel 4 CH ON 64 Channel 3 101 PAN EFF1 SND 102 Channel EFF1 SND 103 Channel EFF1 SND 104 Channel 25 Channel 5 CH ON 65 Channel 4 26 Channel 6 CH ON 66 Channel 5 27 Channel 7 CH ON 67 Channel 6 28 Channel 8 CH ON 68 Channel 7 29 Channel 9 CH ON 69 Channel 8 30 Channel 10 CH ON 70 Channel 9 31 Channel 11 CH ON 71 Channel 10 32 No Assign ---- ---- 72 Channel 11 33 Channel 12 CH ON 73 Channel 12 34 Channel 13 CH ON 74 Channel 13 35 Channel 14 CH ON 75 Channel 14 36 Channel 15 CH ON 76 Channel 15 37 Channel 16 CH ON 77 Channel 16 38 Channel 17 CH ON 78 Channel 17 39 Channel 18 CH ON 79 Channel 18 212 Not available 15 EFF2 SND 16 EFF2 SND 17 EFF2 SND EFF1 SND 105 Channel EFF1 SND 106 Channel EFF1 SND 107 Channel 18 EFF2 SND 19 EFF2 SND 20 EFF2 SND EFF1 SND 108 Master EFF1 SND 109 Master EFF1 SND 110 Master ST-BUSS FADER AUX1 FADER AUX2 FADER EFF1 SND 111 Master EFF1 SND 112 Master EFF1 SND 113 Master AUX3 FADER AUX4 FADER EFF1 FADER EFF1 SND 114 Master EFF1 SND 115 Master EFF1 SND 116 Effect EFF2 FADER ST-BUSS CH ON EFF1 LIB.RCL EFF1 SND 117 Effect EFF2 EFF1 SND 118 No Assign ---EFF1 SND 119 No Assign ---- LIB.RCL ------- VM200 UserÕs Guide Preset Scene Parameters Preset Scene Parameters P0 (Init_Mix) Category CH PAN AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND AUX1&2 PAN AUX3&4 PAN EQ/LO Gain EQ/LO Freq EQ/LO Q EQ/LO-MID Gain EQ/LO-MID Freq EQ/LO-MID Q Channels EQ/HI-MID Gain 1–20 EQ/HI-MID Freq EQ/HI-MID Q EQ/HI Gain EQ/HI Freq EQ/HI Q EQ ON ROUTING ST-BUSS VM200 UserÕs Guide Value Parameter CH FADER CH ON –∞ ON Ch1–16:Center Ch17,19:L10.0 Ch18,20:R10.0 –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ Center Center 0 125 L-S 0 500 1.0 0 2.00K 1.0 0 8.00K H-S ON All channels ROUTING REC-BUSS OFF ROUTING DIRECT OFF PHASE NORMAL CH PAIR Ch1–16:off Ch17-20:on MUTE GROUP OFF FADER GROUP OFF S/P DIF IN OFF Category MASTER SCENE STATUS Others Parameter Value ST-BUSS MASTER ST-BUSS ON AUX1 MASTER AUX1 ON AUX2 MASTER AUX2 ON AUX3 MASTER AUX3 ON AUX4 MASTER AUX4 ON EFF1 MASTER EFF1 ON EFF2 MASTER EFF2 ON EQ ENABLE ADD.AUX AUX1 POST/PRE AUX2 POST/PRE AUX3 POST/PRE AUX4 POST/PRE EFF1 POST/PRE EFF2 POST/PRE AUX1&2 PAIR AUX3&4 PAIR Scene Name 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 1–8 ON POST POST POST POST POST POST OFF OFF Init_Mix 01: Normal Large Hall 38: 3D Chorus EFFECT1 EFFECT2 213 P1 (Recording) Category CH FADER CH ON CH PAN AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND AUX1&2 PAN AUX3&4 PAN EQ/LO Gain EQ/LO Freq EQ/LO Q EQ/LO-MID Gain EQ/LO-MID Freq EQ/LO-MID Q Channels EQ/HI-MID Gain 1–20 EQ/HI-MID Freq EQ/HI-MID Q EQ/HI Gain EQ/HI Freq EQ/HI Q EQ ON ROUTING ST-BUSS 214 Value Parameter –∞ ON Ch1–16:Center Ch17,19:L10.0 Ch18,20:R10.0 –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ Center Center 0 125 L-S 0 500 1.0 0 2.00K 1.0 0 8.00K H-S ON Ch9–20 ROUTING REC-BUSS Ch1–8 ROUTING DIRECT OFF PHASE NORMAL CH PAIR Ch1–16:off Ch17-20:on MUTE GROUP OFF FADER GROUP OFF S/P DIF IN OFF Category MASTER SCENE STATUS Others Parameter Value ST-BUSS MASTER ST-BUSS ON AUX1 MASTER AUX1 ON AUX2 MASTER AUX2 ON AUX3 MASTER AUX3 ON AUX4 MASTER AUX4 ON EFF1 MASTER EFF1 ON EFF2 MASTER EFF2 ON EQ ENABLE ADD.AUX AUX1 POST/PRE AUX2 POST/PRE AUX3 POST/PRE AUX4 POST/PRE EFF1 POST/PRE EFF2 POST/PRE AUX1&2 PAIR AUX3&4 PAIR Scene Name 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 1–8 OFF POST POST POST POST POST POST OFF OFF Recording 01: Normal Large Hall 38: 3D Chorus EFFECT1 EFFECT2 VM200 UserÕs Guide Preset Scene Parameters P2 (Mix_Down) Category CH FADER CH ON CH PAN AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND AUX1&2 PAN AUX3&4 PAN EQ/LO Gain EQ/LO Freq EQ/LO Q EQ/LO-MID Gain EQ/LO-MID Freq EQ/LO-MID Q Channels EQ/HI-MID Gain 1–20 EQ/HI-MID Freq EQ/HI-MID Q EQ/HI Gain EQ/HI Freq EQ/HI Q EQ ON ROUTING ST-BUSS VM200 UserÕs Guide Value Parameter –∞ ON Ch1–16:Center Ch17,19:L10.0 Ch18,20:R10.0 –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ –∞ Center Center 0 125 L-S 0 500 1.0 0 2.00K 1.0 0 8.00K H-S ON All channels ROUTING REC-BUSS OFF ROUTING DIRECT OFF PHASE NORMAL CH PAIR Ch1–16:off Ch17-20:on MUTE GROUP OFF FADER GROUP OFF S/P DIF IN OFF Category MASTER SCENE STATUS Others Parameter Value ST-BUSS MASTER ST-BUSS ON AUX1 MASTER AUX1 ON AUX2 MASTER AUX2 ON AUX3 MASTER AUX3 ON AUX4 MASTER AUX4 ON EFF1 MASTER EFF1 ON EFF2 MASTER EFF2 ON EQ ENABLE ADD.AUX AUX1 POST/PRE AUX2 POST/PRE AUX3 POST/PRE AUX4 POST/PRE EFF1 POST/PRE EFF2 POST/PRE AUX1&2 PAIR AUX3&4 PAIR Scene Name 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 0dB ON 9–16 ON POST POST POST POST POST POST OFF OFF Mix_Down 01: Normal Large Hall 38: 3D Chorus EFFECT1 EFFECT2 215 MIDI In/Out Data Format 1. CHANGE MESSAGE 1-1.NOTE OFF (8n) NOTE OFF messages are not received or transmitted.Program Change messages are transmitted on the channel set by [TX CH] when you recall a scene assigned in the table selected by [PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] and when [PROGRAM CHANGE TX] is set to ON. If the same scene is assigned to multiple Program numbers, the smallest Program number will be transmitted. 1-2.NOTE ON (9n) STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change NOTE ON messages are not received or transmitted. DATA 0nnnnnnn 1-3.CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) Control Change messages are received only when [CONTROL CHANGE RX] is set to ON and the receive channel [RX CH] matches. If [RX CH] is set to OMNI, the message is received regardless of which channel is receiving. Control Change messages are “echoed” when [ECHO] is set to ON. The parameters are controlled based on the settings selected by [CONTROL CHANGE TABLE]. If the messages are received while the [CTL TABLE] setting page is displayed, the cursor automatically moves to the corresponding Control Change number. Control Change messages are transmitted on the channel set by [TX CH] when you operate the or item assigned in the table selected by [CONTROL CHANGE TABLE] and when [CONTROL CHANGE TX] is set to ON. If the same item is assigned to multiple Control numbers, the smallest Control number will be transmitted. STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change DATA 0cccccccc cc Control No. (0–95, 102–119) 9vvvvvvvv vv Control Value (0–127) 1-4.PROGRAM CHANGE (Bn) 2. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0–F7) 2-1.MOTION CONTROL STATE (MCS MMC STOP/PLAY/FORWARD/REWIND/ RECORD/PAUSE Operating the key in the [MMC SEND] page will transmit these messages. Use [Dev ID.] to specify the destination. STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID0ddddddd dd Destination (00–7E, 7F:all call) Command 00000110 06 MMC sub-id 0ccccccc cc Command String [1]: Stop [2]: Play [4]: Fast Forward [5]: Rewind [6]: Record Strobe [9]: Pause EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 2-2.MOTION CONTROL PROCESS (MCP) MMC LOCATE (target) Operating the key in the [MMC SEND] page will transmit these messages. Use [Dev ID] to specify the destination. STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID0ddddddd Command 00000110 Program Change messages are received only 01000100 when [PROGRAM CHANGE RX] is set to ON 00000110 and the receive channel [RX CH] matches. If 00000001 [RX CH] is set to OMNI, the message is 0hhhhhhh received regardless of which channel is receiv0mmmmmmm ing. 0ssssss Program Change messages are “echoed” when 0fffffff [ECHO] is set to ON. 0sssssss A scene is recalled according to the settings EOX 11110111 selected by [PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE]. If the messages are received while the [PGM TABLE] setting page is displayed, the cursor automatically moves to the corresponding PGM number. 216 nn Program No. (0–127) dd Destination (00–7E, 7F:all call) 06 44 06 01 hh mm ss ff ss MMC sub-id Locate byte count “target” sub command hour minute second frame sub frame (only ‘0’) F7 End Of Exclusive VM200 User’s Guide MIDI In/Out Data Format 3. FOSTEX EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE Fostex Exclusive messages are received when [SYSTEM EX. Tx&Rx] is set to ON and the Rx channel matches the channel of [Dev ID]. When the VM200 receives the System Exclusive message, the specified parameter will be changed immediately. When the VM200 receives the Parameter Request message, the corresponding parameter setting will be transmitted immediately. Fostex Exclusive messages are transmitted if the Tx channel matches the channel of [Dev ID] and when you operate the key while [SYSTEM EX. Tx&Rx] is ON. In response to the Parameter Request messages, VM200 transmits the parameter settings if the Tx channel matches the channel of [Dev ID]. F0 51 Sub Id> F7 Command List Setup Command Command Request Status Master Clock 18,10 28,10 Fs 18,11 28,11 38,10 38,11 Current Scene Name 18,20 28,20 38,20 Scene Recall 18,22 Scene Store 18,23 Rcl Safe – Fader 18,28,11 28,28,11 38,28,11 Rcl Safe – Pan 18,28,12 28,28,12 38,28,12 Rcl Safe – Routing 18,28,30,7f 28,28,30,7f 38,28,30,7f Rcl Safe – Aux Send Level 18,28,41 28,28,41 38,28,41 Rcl Safe – Eff Send Level 18,28,49 28,28,49 38,28,49 Rcl Safe – Eq On 18,28,50,7f 28,28,50,7f 38,28,50,7f Rcl Safe – Eq 18,28,5f 28,28,5f 38,28,5f Eq Enable Ch 18,30 28,30 38,30 Add Aux Mode 18,31 28,31 38,31 Mon Sel 18,40 28,40 38,40 Solo Mode 18,42 28,42 38,42 Solo Key Mode 18,43 28,43 38,43 Motor OnOff 18,50 28,50 38,50 Power On Recall 18,51 28,51 38,51 Cascade 18,52 28,52 38,52 Memory Backup 18,60 Smoothing 18,32 f7 28,32,17 38,32 f7 Channel/Buss Command Command Request Status ST Buss – Ch On 19,01,10 29,01,10 39,01,10 ST Buss – Master Fader 19,01,11 29,01,11 39,01,11 ST Buss – Solo 19,01,19 29,01,19 39,01,19 REC Buss – Master Level 19,02,11 29,02,11 39,02,11 REC Buss – Solo 19,02,19 29,02,19 39,02,19 AUX Buss – Ch On 19,05 10 29,05 10 39,05 10 AUX Buss – Master Fader 19,05 11 29,05 11 39,05 11 AUX Buss – Solo 19,05 19 29,05 19 39,05 19 VM200 User’s Guide 217 Command EFF Buss – Ch On Request Status 19,06 10 29,06 10 39,06 10 EFF Buss – Master Fader 19,06 11 29,06 11 39,06 11 EFF Buss – Solo 19,06 19 29,06 19 39,06 19 CH1-20 – Ch On 19,10 10 29,10 10 39,10 10 CH1-20 – Ch Fader 19,10 11 29,10 11 39,10 11 CH1-20 – Ch Pan 19,10 12 29,10 12 39,10 12 CH1-20 – Ch Solo 19,10 19 29,10 19 39,10 19 CH1-20 – Phase 19,10 21 29,10 21 39,10 21 CH1-20 – S/P DIF IN 19,10 26 29,10 26 39,10 26 CH1-20 – Rout:ST Buss 19,10 30 29,10 30 39,10 30 CH1-20 – Rout:Rec Buss 19,10 31 29,10 31 39,10 31 CH1-20 – Rout:Adat Dir. 19,10 33 29,10 33 39,10 33 CH1-20 – Aux Send Level 19,10 41 29,10 41 39,10 41 CH1-20 – Aux Post/Pre 19,10 43 29,10 43 39,10 43 CH1-20 – Eff Send Level 19,10 49 29,10 49 39,10 49 CH1-20 – Eff Post/Pre 19,10 4b 29,10 4b 39,10 4b CH1-20 – Eq On 19,10 50 29,10 50 39,10 50 CH1-20 – Eq Type(Q) 19,10 51 29,10 51 39,10 51 CH1-20 – Eq Gain 19,10 52 29,10 52 39,10 52 CH1-20 – Eq Freq. 19,10 53 29,10 53 39,10 53 CH1-20 – Eq Lib Recall 19,10 5e CH1-20 – Eq Lib Store 19,10 5f CH1-20 – Ch Pair 19,10 70 29,10 70 39,10 70 Ch1-20 – Fader Group 19,10 71 29,10 71 39,10 71 CH1-20 – Mute Group 19,10 72 29,10 72 39,10 72 CH1-20 – Ch Solo Safe 19,10 73 29,10 73 39,10 73 CH1-20 – Ch Recall Safe 19,10 74 29,10 74 39,10 74 Effects Command Command Request Status Eff Type 1a 10 2a 10 3a 10 Eff Parameter 1a 11 2a 11 3a 11